624140
46
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/269
Pagina verder
2008
A010A02A-AAT
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's specific
warranty coverage.
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility
to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.
When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.
Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.
F1
A030A01JM
OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01JM-AAT
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any
time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard
equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
F2
A070A01A-AAT
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety
or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation
and other federal or state agencies.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an
improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this
reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
!
F3
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if
the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is
not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
!
!
F4
A110A01A-AAT
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems that
help to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. These
systems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems and components and help to
control their operation. These computerized system operations are wide-ranging and involve
components to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat belt
pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner systems should be
deployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, traction
control and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficult driving
situations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians when
they need to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crash
occurs that results in the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage
is done by devices called event data recorders(EDR).
After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as the Supplemental
Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may record some information
about the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This information consists of data
related to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seat belt systems
at the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severity occurred to
require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment.
To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that
stores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it with
others except:
o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, or
o with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, or
o as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, or
o as required by law.
F5
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who
drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which
we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai
dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may
be required.
A050A04A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave
the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION:
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not
meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-
tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear
in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2008 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in
any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor
Company.
!
F6
A100A03A-AAT
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts
used by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-
facture vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, performance,
and reliability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and
built to meet rigid manufacturing require-
ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage parts is not covered under the
Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or
any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any
damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai
Parts caused by the installation or failure of
an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part
is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasing
Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on
the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the United
States are packaged with labels written only
in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through
authorized Hyundai Dealerships.
To find the closest authorized dealer call
1-800-826-CARS
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
F7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &
BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
B250A01JM-AAT
B250A01JM-U
F9
1. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)
2. 4WD Lock Switch (If installed)
3. Traction Control System (TCS) Switch (If installed) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch (If installed)
4. Instrument Cluster
5. Multi-Function Light Switch (If installed)
6. Front Window Defroster (If installed) / Aux Outlet (If installed)
7. Hazard Warning Light Switch
8. Digital Clock
9. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
10. Rear Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirror Heater Switch
(If installed)
11. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)
12. Passenger's Airbag
13. Hood Release Lever
14. Horn and Driver's Airbag
15. Small Article Tray / Ashtray (If installed)
16. Cruise Control Switch (If installed)
17. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)
18. Shift Lever (If installed)
19. Glove Box
CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor
on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,
instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these
areas, wash them with water immediately.
!
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
F10
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
B255A03JM-AAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-48.
Parking Brake/Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
Malfunction Indicator Light
Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime (If installed)
Traction Control Indicator Light
(If installed)
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)
Cruise Indicator (If installed)
4WD Lock Indicator Light (If installed)
4WD System Warning Light (If installed)
SET Indicator Light (If installed)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator
Lights (If Installed)
Low tire pressure telltale (If installed)
TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system) malfunction
indicator (If installed)
1
Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2
Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3
Keys.............................................................................. 1-3
Door .............................................................................. 1-4
Power Windows .......................................................... 1-11
Seats ........................................................................... 1-12
Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-18
Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-25
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) system ................. 1-33
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-46
Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-48
Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-58
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-60
Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-68
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-73
How to use Luggage Room ........................................ 1-79
Hood Release ............................................................. 1-84
Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-87
Heating and Cooling Control ..................................... 1-102
Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-109
Audio System............................................................ 1-111
Antenna ..................................................................... 1-126
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2
!
B010A01JM
FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION:
Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems that
are caused by the use of fuels containing
methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-
gen Content 2.7% weight.)
B010B01A-AAT
What About Gasohol?
Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline
and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used
in your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-
ops driveability problems, the use of 100%
unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with
unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols
other than ethanol, should not be used.
B010A05A-AAT
Use Unleaded Gasoline
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane
Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)
or higher must be used in your Hyundai.
B010C01A-AAT
Use of MTBE
Hyundai recommends that fuels containing
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should not
be used in your Hyundai.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-
formance and produce vapor lock or hard
starting.
B010D01A-AAT
Do Not Use Methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should
not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel
can reduce vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.
!
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
WARNING:
o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-
matically shuts off when refueling.
o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise
the " " light will illuminate.
o Always check that the fuel cap is in-
stalled securely to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3
KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI
B010F01A-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries
If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another
country, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding registra-
tion and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
B010E01A-AAT
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-
ommends that you use gasolines treated with
detergent additives, which help prevent deposit
formation in the engine. These gasolines will
help the engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control System.
B020A01S-AAT
During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)
No formal "break-in" procedure is required with
your new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-
ute to the economical operation and durability of
your Hyundai by observing the following recom-
mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000
km).
o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).
o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,
or revolutions per minute) between 2,000
rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start
quickly or depress the accelerator pedal
fully.
o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoid
hard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't
drive so slowly in too high a gear that the
engine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed
from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes
at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles
(2,000 km) of operation.
B030A01A-AAT
For greater convenience, the same key oper-
ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,
because the doors can be locked without a key,
carrying a spare key is recommended in case
you accidentally lock one key inside the car.
B030A01HR
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
4
B030C01E-1
DOOR LOCKS
!
B040A01A-AATB030C01JM-AAT
ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH
(If installed)
Whenever either front door is opened, the igni-
tion switch will be illuminated for your conve-
nience, provided the ignition switch is not in the
"ON" position.
The light will go off approximately 10 seconds
after closing the door or when the ignition switch
is turned on.
WARNING:
o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-
fore you drive away (especially if there
are children in the car), be sure that all the
doors are securely closed and locked so
that the doors cannot be opened from
the inside. This helps ensure that the
doors will not be opened accidentally.
Also, when combined with the proper
use of seat belts, locking the doors helps
keep occupants from being ejected from
the car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.
B030B01A-AAT
Record Your Key Number
A code number is stamped on the number plate
that came with the keys to your Hyundai. This
key number plate should not be left with the keys
but kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. The
key number should also be recorded in a place
where it can be found in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you should lose
your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can
make new keys if you can supply the key
number.
B030B01HR
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5
UNLOCK
LOCK
HJM2007
B040B01JM-AAT
Locking, unlocking front doors with a
key
o The door can be locked or unlocked with a
key.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward the
front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the
key toward the rear.
NOTE:
The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-
ing the key once toward the rear. If you wish
to unlock all doors, turn the key again
toward the rear within 4 seconds. The
passenger's side will lock or unlock all
doors with just one rotation.
B040C01JM
B040C02O-AAT
Locking From the Outside
(Driver's side - without key)
The doors can be locked without a key. To lock
the doors, first push the inside lock switch to the
"LOCK" position so that the red mark on the
switch is not visible, then close the door.
NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
driver's door to the "LOCK" position,
only the driver's door can be locked.
o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-
tral door locking system, the door will
not lock if the key is left in the ignition
switch when the front doors are closed.
o When locking the door this way, be care-
ful not to lock the door with the ignition
key left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, always
remove the ignition key, close all win-
dows, and lock all doors and the tail gate
when leaving your vehicle unattended.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6
B045D01JM-AAT
Locking From the Inside
(Passenger's side)
To lock the door from the inside, simply close the
door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"
position. When this is done, neither the outside
nor the passenger's inside door handles can be
used.
The door can be locked without a key. To lock
the door, first push the inside lock switch to the
"LOCK" position so that the red mark on the
switch is not visible, then close the door.
NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-
tion, only the passengers door will be
locked.
o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-
tral door locking system, the door will
not lock if the key is left in the ignition
switch when the front doors are closed.
B045C01JM-AAT
Locking From the Outside
(Passenger's side - Without key)
o When locking the door this way, be care-
ful not to lock the door with the ignition
key left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, always
remove the ignition key, close all win-
dows, and lock all doors and the tail gate
when leaving your vehicle unattended.
B045C01JM
HJM2008-D
UNLOCK
LOCK
B040D01O-AAT
Locking From the Inside
(Driver's side)
To lock the door from the inside, simply close the
door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"
position.
NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
driver's door to the "LOCK" position,
only the driver's door can be locked.
o When the door is locked, the red mark on
the switch is not visible.
o The driver's door can be opened by
pulling the inside door handle even if the
lock switch is depressed.
HJM2008
UNLOCK
LOCK
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
7
B040E04A-AAT
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock
Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side
"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lock
mechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot be
opened from the inside. Its use is recommended
whenever there are small children in the rear
seat.
HJM2011
B040G03HP-AAT
Central Door Locks
The central door locking switch is located on
the front door arm rest. It is operated by
depressing the door lock switch.
HJM2010
NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-
tion, only the passenger's door locks.
o When the door is locked, the red mark on
the switch is not visible.
To engage the child-protector feature so that
the door cannot be opened from the inside,
move the child-protector lever to the " "
position and close the door. Move the lever to
the " " position when normal door operation
is desired.
To open the door from the outside, pull the
outside door handle.
NOTE:
o When pushing the front portion of the
switch, all vehicle doors will lock. If any
door is open when the switch is de-
pressed, the door will remain locked
when closed.
o When pushing the rear portion of the
switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
o The central door locking is operated by
turning the key in the front door lock
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times
in rapid succession with either the vehicle
key or door lock switch, the system may
stop operating temporarily in order to pro-
tect the circuit and prevent damage to sys-
tem components.
B070F03O-AAT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
HJM2120
Driver's door
Passenger's door
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8
B070B02JM
UNLOCK
LOCK
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
B075B01O-AAT
Armed Stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
B070A01A-AAT
(If installed)
This system is designed to provide protection
from unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-
tem is operated in three stages : the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage
and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible alarm
with blinking of the turn signal lights.
Locking doors
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal
lights will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-
ter.
2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,
the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
NOTE:
If you wish to unlock all doors, press the
"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again
within 4 seconds.
CAUTION:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
!
NOTE:
The transmitter will not work if any of fol-
lowing occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit
(393.7 inches [10 m]).
- The battery in the transmitter is weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be block-
ing the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio trans-
mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with the
ignition key. If you have a problem with the
transmitter, contact an authorized Hyundai
Dealer.
NOTE:
Keep the transmitter away from water or
any liquid. If the keyless entry system is
inoperative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it will not be covered by your manu-
facturer vehicle warranty.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9
1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch.
2) Make sure that the hood and tail gate are
closed and latched.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the
keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the turn
signal lights will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
NOTE:
o If any door, the tail gate or engine hood
remains open, the system will not be
armed. If this happens, rearm the system
as described above.
o If the "LOCK" button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds after pushing the
"LOCK" button on the transmitter, the
siren will sound once to indicate that the
system is armed.
CAUTION:
Do not arm the system until all passengers
have left the car. If the system is armed while
a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm
may be activated when the remaining
passenger(s) leaves the car.
!
B075C01JM-AAT
Alarm Stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the following
occurs while the car is parked and the system
is armed.
1) A front or rear door is opened without using
the transmitter or the ignition key.
2) The tail gate is opened without using the
transmitter or the ignition key.
3) The hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the turn signal lights will
blink continuously for about 30 seconds (This
will repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,
unlock the door or tail gate using the transmitter
or the ignition key.
B075D01JM-AAT
Disarmed Stage
The system will be disarmed by using the
transmitter or the ignition key.
The driver's door is unlocked by depressing
once the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UN-
LOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4
seconds.
Whenever the step above is completed, the turn
signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the
system is disarmed.
NOTE :
The system will rearm if a door, tailgate, or
hood is not opened within 30 seconds.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
10
B070E02HP-AAT
Replacing the battery
When the transmitter's battery begins to get
weak, it may take several pushes on the button
to lock or unlock the doors. Replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032
Replacement instructions:
1. Carefully separate the case with a blade
screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
2. Remove the old battery from the case and
note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same(+side facing
down), then insert it in the transmitter.
B070E02JM
Screwdriver
B070E01JM
Battery
Case
B075E01JM-AAT
Panic Warning
1. Push the "PANIC" button on the back side of
the transmitter.
2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the
turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.
3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"
button again on the transmitter.
B075E01JM
PANIC
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
11
POWER WINDOWS
B060A03Y-AAT
The power windows operate when the ignition
key is in the "ON" position. The main switches
are located on the driver's armrest and control
the front and rear windows on both sides of the
vehicle. The windows may be opened by de-
pressing the appropriate window switch and
closed by pulling up the switch. To open the
window on the driver's side, press the switch
halfway down. The window moves as long as
the switch is operated. To fully open the driver's
window automatically, press the switch fully
down. In automatic operation, the window will
fully open even if you let go of the switch. To stop
at the desired opening, pull up and release the
switch.
B060A03JM
!
In order to prevent operation of the passenger
front and rear windows, a window lock switch is
provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To
disable the power windows, press the window
lock switch. To revert to normal operation,
press the window lock switch a second time.
NOTE:
The power windows can be operated for 30
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removed
from the ignition switch.
If the front doors are opened during this 30
second period, the power windows can no
longer be operated without the ignition key
turned to the "ON" position.
WARNING:
(1)Be careful that someone's head, hands
and body are not trapped by a closing
window.
(2)Never try to operate the main switch on
the driver's door and the individual door
window switch in opposing directions
at the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be opened
or closed.
(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.
Always remove the ignition key for their
safety.
HJM2016
Close
Open
HJM2017
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
12
HJM2033
!
B080B03A-AAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward
To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull
the lock release lever upward. This will release
the seat on its track so you can move it forward
or rearward to the desired position. When you
find the position you want, release the lever and
slide the seat forward or rearward on its track
until it locks into the desired position and cannot
be moved further.
B080C03A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, lean forward to take
your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner
control lever at the outside edge of the seat.
WARNING:
After adjusting the seat, always check that
it is securely locked into place by attempt-
ing to move the seat forward or reverse
without using the lock release lever. Sud-
den or unexpected movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle resulting in an accident.
HJM2031
SEATS
B080A02A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS
!
WARNING:
o Never adjust the driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. Any sudden or unex-
pected movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident. Only adjust the
driver’s seat when the vehicle is station-
ary.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the airbag. Position the seat so that you
can sit as far back as possible from the
airbag and still comfortably reach all
controls.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
13
!
WARNING:
Riding with a reclined seatback increases
your chance of serious or fatal injuries in
the event of a collision or sudden stop. The
protection of your restraint system (seat
belts and airbags) is greatly reduced by
reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug
against your hips and chest to work prop-
erly. The more the seatback is reclined, the
greater the chance that an occupant's hips
will slide under the lap belt or the occupant's
neck will strike the shoulder belt. Drivers
and passengers should always sit well back
in their seats, properly belted, and with the
seatbacks upright.
B080D02JM-AAT
Adjustable Headrests
Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk
of neck injuries.
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower the
headrest, push it down while pressing the lock
knob. To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the lock knob while pulling
upward. This should only be done when the seat
is not occupied.
HJM2044
Lock Knob
Now lean back until the desired seatback angle
is achieved. To lock the seatback into position,
release the recliner control lever.
B080E01JM-GAT
Forward and backward adjustment
(if installed)
The headrest may be adjusted forward to three
different positions by pulling the headrest for-
ward. To adjust the headrest backward, pull it
fully forward to the farthest position and release
it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly sup-
ports the head and neck.
HJM2045-2
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
14
B080F01A-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)
To raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-
ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-
ward.
HJM2035
!
B080D01JM
WARNING:
o For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident the headrest should be ad-
justed so the middle of the headrest is at
the same height as the top of the
occupant's eyes. For this reason, the
use of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not recom-
mended.
o Do not operate vehicle with the head-
rests removed as injury to the occupants
may occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection
against neck injuries when properly ad-
justed.
o Do not adjust the headrest hejght while
the vehicle is in motion.
B083D01NF-AAT
Active Headrests (If Installed)
The active headrest is designed to move for-
ward and upward during a rear impact. This
helps to prevent the driver's and front
passenger's head from moving backward and
thus helps prevent neck injuries.
HNF2041-1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
15
!
HJM2041
B080H02JM-GAT
Seatback table (if installed)
The seatback table is made by folding the front
passenger seat forward.
To operate the seatback table
1. Lower the headrest.
2. With the recliner control lever pulled up, fold
the front passenger seatback forward to the
flat position.
3. When returning the seatback to the upright
position, ensure the seatback is completely
locked into place.
Recliner control lever
WARNING:
o Do not sit on the seatback table.
o Do not place items on the seatback table
when the vehicle is in motion.
o Do not leave items on the seatback table
when the vehicle is in motion.
B100A02JM-AAT
SEAT WARMER (If installed)
HJM2042
The seat warmer is provided to warm the front
seats during cold weather. With the ignition key
in the "ON" position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's
seat.
B080E01F-AAT
Lumbar Support Control
(Driver's seat only) (If Installed)
The driver's seat is equipped with adjustable
lumbar support.
To increase the amount of lumbar support, pull
the lever forward.
To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.
SOFT
HJM2036
FIRM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
16
B085A01JM-GAT
REAR SEAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, pull the seatback
folding lever and release it after the desired
seatback angle is achieved.
When you recline the seatback to desired po-
sition, always be sure it has locked into position.
HJM2046
Seatback
folding lever
!
HJM2047
B085B02JM-AAT
Folding Rear Seatback
For convenience, the seatbacks and seat cush-
ions may be folded down and up.
CAUTION:
When reclining the seatback, you should
adjust the seatback folding lever while
standing.
1. Pull the seatback folding lever then push
down the seatback.
2. Be sure it has locked into position to listen an
audible "Click".
!
WARNING:
It is recommended that the seat heater not
be used when elderly people or people who
are ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use the
seat warmer if the occupant is sleeping.
During mild weather or under conditions where
the operation of the seat warmer is not needed,
keep the switches in the "OFF" position.
NOTE:
o The seat warmer will not operate if the
ambient temperature is higher than
82.4°F ± 6.3°F (28°C ± 3.5°C).
o If the seat warmer doesn't work when
ambient temperature is lower than 75.2°F
(24°C), it should be checked at an autho-
rized dealer.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
17
!
!
3. To return the seatback to its normal position,
pull the seatback folding lever and reverse
the above procedure.
o When you return the seatback to its upright
position, always be sure it is locked into
position by pulling and pushing on the top of
the seatback.
WARNING:
o The purpose of the fold-down rear seat
back is to allow you to carry larger items
than could otherwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on the
cargo area while the car is moving. This
is not a proper seating position and no
seat belts are available for use when the
seat back is folded down.
This could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or a sudden
stop. Objects should not extend higher
than the top of the front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage during sud-
den stops.
o When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position after being folded down,
be careful not to damage the seatbelt
webbing or buckle. In addition, do not
allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to
get caught or pinched in the rear seat.
o When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position, be sure it is locked into
position. Attempt to move it.
o Never attempt to fold or return seat while
the vehicle is moving.
WARNING:
HJM2048
!
NOTE:
o Before folding the seatback, place the
rear seat belt buckles in the buckle pouch
on the seatback. This will prevent the
seat belt buckles from becoming cov-
ered by the seat cushion when it is
returned to the seating position.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overload seatback. Over-
loading may cause damage the seatback.
!
B140A01B-AAT
REAR SEAT WARNING
For the safety of all passengers, luggage or
other cargo should not be piled higher than
the top of the seatback.
B140A01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
18
B150C02A-AAT
Larger Children
Children who are too large for child restraint
systems should always occupy the rear seat
and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened snug on the hips and
as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of posi-
tion. Children are afforded the most safety in the
event of an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If
a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in
the front seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and
the seat should be placed in the rearmost
position. Children under the age of 13 should be
restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
B150D01A-AAT
Pregnant Women
The use of a seat belt is recommended for
pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury
in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap
belt portion should be placed as low and snugly
as possible on the hips, not across the abdo-
men. For specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
SEAT BELTS
B150B04Y-AAT
Infant or Small Child
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific requirements in
your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must
be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
Information about the use of these restraints
begins on page 1-25.
!
B150A02S-AAT
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
All occupants of the vehicle must wear their
seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the event of a
collision or sudden stop. Without a seat
belt, occupants could be shifted too close
to a deploying airbag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the vehicle.
Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce
these hazards. Even with advanced airbags,
unbelted occupants can be severely in-
jured by a deploying airbag. Always follow
the precautions about seat belts, airbags
and occupant safety contained in this
manual.
!
WARNING:
Every person in your vehicle needs to be
properly restrained at all times, including
infants and children. Never hold a child in
your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created during a crash
will tear the child from your arms and throw
the child against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your child's
height and weight, see page 1-25.
NOTE:
Small children are best protected from in-
jury in an accident when properly restrained
in the rear seat by a child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight. Check
the label on the child restraint for this
information. See page 1-25.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
19
WARNING:
Riding with a reclined seatback increases
your chance of serious or fatal injuries in
the event of a collision or sudden stop. The
protection of your restraint system (seat
belts and airbags) is greatly reduced by
reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug
against your hips and chest to work prop-
erly. The more the seatback is reclined, the
greater the chance that an occupant's hips
will slide under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's neck
could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers and
passengers should always sit well back in
their seats, properly belted (see page 1-21),
and with the seatbacks upright.
!
B150E01A-AAT
Injured Person
A seat belt should be used when an injured
person is being transported. When this is nec-
essary, you should consult a physician for
recommendations.
B150F01A-AAT
One Person Per Belt
Two people (including children) should never
attempt to use a single seat belt. This could
increase the severity of injuries in case of an
accident.
B150G02A-AAT
Do Not Lie Down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of
an accident and to achieve maximum effective-
ness of the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front seats should
be in an upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if
the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the
front seat is in a reclined position.
!
B160A02A-AAT
CARE OF SEAT BELTS
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled
or modified. In addition, care should be taken to
assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not
damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING:
When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position after the rear seatback was
folded down, be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that
the webbing or buckle does not get caught
or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with
damaged webbing or buckle will not be as
strong and could possibly fail during a
collision or sudden stop, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
B160B01A-AAT
Periodic Inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be in-
spected periodically for wear or damage of any
kind. Parts of the system that are damaged
should be replaced as soon as possible.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
20
!
WARNING:
o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked
into position at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder belt across
your neck or face. Improperly posi-
tioned seat belts can cause serious inju-
ries in an accident.
o Failure to replace seat belts after an
accident could leave you with damaged
seat belts that will not provide protec-
tion in the event of another collision
leading to personal injury or death.
Replace your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
Release the button to lock the anchor into
position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make
sure that it has locked into the position.
HJM2050
B160C01A-AAT
Keep Belts Clean and Dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts
become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a
mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and weaken
the fabric.
B160D01A-AAT
When to Replace Seat Belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies
should be replaced if the vehicle has been
involved in an accident. This should be done
even if no damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation should be
directed to your Hyundai Dealer.
B170A05Y-AAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT
SHOULDER BELT
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt
anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near
your neck, you will not be getting the most
effective protection. The shoulder portion should
be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and
midway over your shoulder nearest the door
and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,
lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-
priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull
it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the
height adjuster button.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
21
B190A02Y-AAT
SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear
Seat 3-Point System with Combination
Locking Retractor
Combination retractor type seat belts are in-
stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-
modate the installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is also installed
in the front passenger seat position, Hyundai
strongly recommends that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant
restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the features of
both an emergency locking retractor seat belt
and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There
will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into
the buckle. When not securing a child restraint,
the seat belt operates in the same way as the
driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly
around your hips. When the seat belt is fully
extended from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt
operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but
not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor
Type). See page 1-29.
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There
will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into
the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.
If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the
belt will extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will
lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean
forward too quickly.
B180A02A-AAT
SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with
Emergency Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt
B180A01L
NOTE:
o If you are not able to pull out the safety
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt
out and release it. Then you will be able
to pull the belt out smoothly.
o If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is in the "ON"
position, the seat belt warning light will
flash and the warning chime will sound
for approximately six seconds.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
22
!
NOTE:
Although the combination retractor pro-
vides the same level of protection for seated
passengers in either emergency or auto-
matic locking modes, it is recommended
that seated passengers use the emergency
locking feature for improved convenience.
The automatic locking function is intended
to facilitate child restraint installation. To
convert from the automatic locking feature
to the emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-
tract.
WARNING:
o For maximum restraint system protec-
tion, the seat belts must always be used
whenever the car is moving.
o Seat belts are most effective when
seatbacks are in the upright position.
o Children age 12 and younger must al-
ways be properly restrained in the rear
seat. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. If a child over 13
must be seated in the front seat, he/she
must be properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as possible.
o Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm or behind your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can cause se-
rious injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway over
your shoulder across your collarbone.
o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A
twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is straight and not
twisted.
o Be careful not to damage the belt web-
bing or hardware. If the belt webbing or
hardware is damaged, replace it.
!
WARNING:
You should place the lap belt portion as low
as possible and snugly across your hips,
not on your waist. If the lap belt is located
too high on your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a collision.
Both arms should not be under or over the
belt. Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.
!
B200A01A-AAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
B200A01L
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
23
!
WARNING:
o Never let anyone ride in the rear center
seat without fastening all metal tabs and
buckles as described in this section.
This seat belt is designed to function as
a typical 3-point restraint (lap/shoulder
belt). Using only the shoulder portion or
lap portion of the belt can result in seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
B220A02JM-AAT
SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat 3-Point
System With Combination Locking Re-
tractor
1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,
confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are
latched together.
2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,
pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).
There will be an audible "click" when the tab
locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically
adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt
is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around
your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you move
around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you
try to lean forward too quickly.
(d)
B220A02Y
B220A01JM-A
(c)
The seat belt is released by pressing the re-
lease button in the locking buckle. When it is
released, the belt should automatically draw
back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure
it is not twisted, then try again.
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
B210A01L
(a)
(b)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
24
!
WARNING:
!
o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b) with the following excep-
tions.
(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks
down.
(2) If transporting an object on the rear
seat may cause damage to the rear
seat center belt.
o Always lock metal tab (a) into buckle (b)
immediately after returning the rear
seatbacks to an upright position. This
portion of the rear center seat belt should
only be unbuckled when the rear seatback
is folded down.
WARNING:
!
B220C01Y-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
When you want to release the seat belt, press
the button in the locking buckle.
WARNING:
The rear seat center belt latching mecha-
nism is different from those for the out-
board rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-
tening the outboard rear seat shoulder belts
or the rear seat center belt, make sure they
are inserted into the correct buckles to
obtain maximum protection from the seat
belt system and assure proper operation.
B220C01JM
B220A02JM
o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b), place metal (a) in the seat belt
clip not to make noise while driving.
To disconnect the metal tab (a) from the buckle
(b) , insert a narrow-ended tool into the groove
located on the buckle (b).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
25
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
B230A05O-AAT
Children riding in the car should sit in the rear
seat and must always be properly restrained to
minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-
dent statistics provided by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger
children not in a child restraint should use one
of the seat belts provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific requirements in
your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must
be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the requirements of
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS). Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a
LATCH system (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a crash if
their restraints are not properly secured. For
small children and babies, a child seat or infant
seat must be used. Before buying a particular
child restraint system, make sure it fits your car
seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the manufac-
turer when installing the child restraint system.
WARNING:
To reduce the chance or serious or fatal
injuries:
o Children of all ages are safer when re-
strained in the rear seat. A child riding in
the front passenger seat can be force-
fully struck by an inflating airbag result-
ing in serious or fatal injuries.
o Always follow the instructions for in-
stallation and use of the child restraint
maker.
o Always make sure the child seat is se-
cured properly in the car and your child
is securely restrained in the child seat.
o Never hold a child in your arms or lap
when riding in a vehicle. The violent
forces created during a crash will tear the
child from your arms and throw the child
against the car’s interior.
o Never put a seat belt over yourself and a
child. During a crash, the belt could
press deep into the child causing seri-
ous internal injuries.
o Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle – not even for a short time. The
car can heat up very quickly, resulting in
serious injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entangle them-
selves in the windows, or lock them-
selves or others inside the vehicle.
!!
WARNING:
o A child restraint system must be placed
in the rear seat. Never install a child or
infant seat on the front passenger's seat.
Should an accident occur and cause the
passenger side airbag to deploy, it could
severely injure or kill an infant or child
seated in an infant or child seat. Thus
only use a child restraint in the rear seat
of your vehicle.
o A safety belt or child restraint system
can become very hot if it is left in a closed
vehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-
side temperature does not feel hot. Be
sure to check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
o When the child restraint system is not in
use, store it in the luggage compartment
or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in the case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
o Children may be seriously injured or
killed by an inflating airbag. All children,
even those too large for child restraints,
must ride in the rear seat.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
26
B230C07O-AAT
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System
Three child restraint hook holders are located
on the rear luggage compartment floor.
This symbol indicates the location of each user
ready tether anchorage.
B230C04JM
B230B01E-AAT
Using a Child Restraint System
For small children and babies, the use of a child
seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or
infant seat should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. It is further
required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's
rear seat since this can make an important
contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided
with three child restraint hook holders for install-
ing the child seat or infant seat.
!
o Never allow two children, or any two
persons, to use the same seat belt.
o Children often squirm and reposition
themselves improperly. Never let a child
ride with the shoulder belt under their
arm or behind their back. Always prop-
erly position and secure children in rear
seat.
o Never allow a child to stand-up or kneel
on the seat or floorboard of a moving
vehicle. During a collision or sudden
stop, the child can be violently thrown
against the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
o Never use an infant carrier or a child
safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback,
it may not provide adequate security in
an accident.
o Seat belts can become very hot, espe-
cially when the car is parked in direct
sunlight. Always check seat belt buck-
les before fastening them over a child.
o Always store or secure a child seat, even
when it is not in use. During a collision
or sudden stop, the child seat could be
thrown inside the vehicle.
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
27
To install the child restraint seat tether
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rear
luggage compartment floor.
B230C05JM
Tether
anchor cover
Child Restraint
Hook Holder
2. Route the child restraint seat tether strap
over the seatback.
Rear luggage compartment floor
B230B01JM
Front of Vehicle
Child
Restraint
Hook
Holders
Tether Strap
Hook
!
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route
the tether strap under the headrest and
between the headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the child
restraint hook holder and tighten to secure
the seat.
WARNING:
o Install the Child Restraint Seat fully rear-
ward against the seatback, with the
seatback reclined two positions from
the most upright latched position.
o A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the child restraint is not
properly anchored. Always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
28
!
WARNING:
!
o Never mount more than one child re-
straint to a single tether or to a single
lower anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats may cause
the tethers or anchorage points to break,
causing serious injury or death.
o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” sys-
tem to install a child restraint system in
the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat
belt metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt buck-
les and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint to
prevent the child from reaching and tak-
ing hold of unretracted seat belts. Un-
latched metal latch plates or tabs may
allow the child to reach the unretracted
seat belts which may result in strangu-
lation and a serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
!
WARNING:
o A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the child restraint is not
properly anchored. Always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
o Never install a child restraint using the
ISOFIX anchors at the center position of
the rear seat. In a crash, the ISOFIX
anchors may break if a car seat is improp-
erly placed in the center position result-
ing in serious or fatal injuries. Only place
a ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seat
in the left or right out-board rear seating
positions (as shown) to the appropriate
ISOFIX anchors provided.
B230D05E-AAT
Securing the Child Restraint Seat with
the "ISOFIX" system
Some child seat manufacturers make safety
seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible child seats.
B230D01JM
WARNING:
o Never mount more than one child re-
straint to a single tether or to a single
lower anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats may cause
the tethers or anchorage points to break,
causing serious injury or death.
These seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to two ISOFIX
anchors at specific seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of child seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the child seat for
forward-facing child seats.
ISOFIX anchors have been provided in your
vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the
left and right outboard rear seating positions.
Their locations are shown in the illustration.
There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for the
center rear seating position.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
29
!
The ISOFIX anchors are located between the
seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat
left and right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIX
or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-
straint seat, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.
Also, test the safety seat before you place the
child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try
to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the
anchors hold the seat in place.
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
ISOFIX Anchor
B230D02JM
B230D03JM
WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if the child restraint is not prop-
erly anchored to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
B230F01JM-AAT
Child Restraint System Installation on
Rear Seat Center Position
To install a child restraint system in the center
rear seat, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely
from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will
engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking
feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but
not extend. Install the child restraint system,
buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to
take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion
of the belt is tight around the child restraint
system and the shoulder portion of the belt is
positioned so that it can not interfere with the
child's head or neck. Also, double check to be
sure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-
matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-
bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the
Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.
B235G02JM
CAUTION:
Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to
get scratched or pinched by the ISOFIX-
seat latch and ISOFIX anchor during the
installation.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
30
!
B230G02O-AAT
Child Restraint System Installation on
Outboard Rear Seats
WARNING:
o If the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child restraint can
move when your vehicle turns or stops
suddenly. A child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the child restraint is not
properly anchored to the car, including
setting the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
o Do not install any child restraint system
in the front passenger seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the passenger
side airbag to deploy, it could severely
injure or kill an infant or child seated in
an infant or child seat. Therefore, only
use a child restraint system in the rear
seat of your vehicle.
To install a child restraint system in the outboard
rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely
from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will
engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking
feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but
not extend. Install the child restraint system,
buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to
take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion
of the belt is tight around the child restraint
system and the shoulder portion of the belt is
positioned so that it can not interfere with the
child's head or neck. Also, double check to be
sure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-
matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-
bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the
Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.
After installation of the child restraint system, try
to move it in all directions to be sure the child
restraint system is securely installed. If you need
to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the
retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and
allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passenger
Emergency Locking usage condition.
NOTE:
o Before installing the child restraint sys-
tem in any seating position, read the
instructions supplied by the child re-
straint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate as de-
scribed, have the system checked imme-
diately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.
B235G03JM-B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
31
HXG229
In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will
activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body.
B180B05JM-AAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.
The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make
sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the
occupant's body in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
with or without airbag activation, depending on
the circumstances of a collision.
!
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists
mainly of the following components. Their loca-
tions are shown in the illustration.
1. SRS airbag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
WARNING:
To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-
tensioner seat belt:
o The seatbelt must be work correctly and
adjusted to the proper position (see
pages 1-20). Please read and follow all of
the important information and precau-
tions about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including seat belts
and advanced airbags – that are pro-
vided in this manual.
o Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
1LDE3100
Driver's airbag
1
2
Passenger's
airbag
3
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
32
!
WARNING:
o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pre-
tensioner seat belts must be replaced.
All seat belts, of any type, should always
be replaced after they have been worn
during a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly
mechanisms become hot during activa-
tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several minutes after
they have been activated.
o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the
pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This
must be done by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt system in any
manner.
o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed
the warnings to not strike, modify, in-
spect, replace, service or repair the pre-
tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
o Always wear seat belts when driving or
riding in a motor vehicle.
CAUTION:
o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag
is connected with the pre-tensioner seat
belts. The SRS airbag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the igni-
tion key has been turned to the "ON"
position, and then it should turn off.
o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-
ing properly, this warning light will illu-
minate even if there is no malfunction of
the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag
warning light does not illuminate when
the ignition key is turned to "ON" or if it
remains illuminated after approximately
6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please have an
authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.
AIR
BAG
!
NOTE:
o Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated
in certain frontal collisions. The pre-
tensioner seat belt may be activated with
or without airbag activation, depending
on the circumstances of a collision. The
pre-tensioners will not be activated if the
seat belts are not being worn at the time
of the collision.
o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard and
fine dust, which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger com-
partment. These are normal operating
conditions and are not hazardous.
o Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should not
be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash
all exposed skin areas thoroughly after
an accident in which the pre-tensioner
seat belts were activated.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
33
ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)
B240A02E-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with an advanced
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The
indications of the system's presence are the
letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbag
pad cover in the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel pad above the
glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side front
panel above the glove box. The purpose of the
SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system alone, in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.
B240A01JM
Driver's Airbag
The SRS uses a collection of sensors to gather
information about the driver's and front
passenger's seat position, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt usage and impact sever-
ity.
The driver's and front passenger's seat position
sensors, which are installed on the seat track,
determine if the seats are fore or aft of a
reference position. Similarly, the seat belt usage
sensors determine if the driver and front
passenger's seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control the SRS
deployment based on how close the driver's
seat is to the steering wheel, how close the
passenger's seat is to the instrument panel,
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and
how severe is the impact.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to control
the airbag inflation with two levels. A first stage
level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for more
severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating posi-
tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRS
Control Module) controls the airbag inflation.
Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
CAUTION:
If the seat position sensor is not working
properly, the SRS airbag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS airbag
system, because the SRS airbag warning
light is connected with the seat position
sensor. If the SRS airbag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, if it remains
illuminated after coming on for approxi-
mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer inspect the seat posi-
tion sensor and the advanced SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.
!
AIR
BAG
Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with an
occupant classification system in the front
passenger's seat. The occupant classification
system detects the presence of a passenger in
the front passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's airbag under certain condi-
tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-
cation System" later in this section.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
34
!!
WARNING:
Always use seat belts and child restraints –
every trip, every time, everyone! Airbags
inflate with considerable force and in the
blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain maxi-
mum benefit from the airbag. Even with
advanced airbags, improperly and unbelted
occupants can be severely injured when
the airbag inflates. Always follow the pre-
cautions about seat belts, airbags and oc-
cupant safety contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or fatal
injuries and receive the maximum safety
benefit from your restraint system:
o Never place a child in any child or booster
seat in the front seat (see child restraints
1-25).
o ABC – Always Buckle Children in the
back seat. It is the safest place for
children of any age to ride.
o Front and side impact airbags can injure
occupants improperly positioned in the
front seats.
o Move your seat as far back as practical
from the front airbags, while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
o Never sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or side airbags.
!
WARNING:
o Modification to the seat structure can
adversely affect the seat position sensor
and cause the airbag to deploy at a
different level than should be provided.
o Do not place any objects underneath the
front seats which could damage the seat
position sensor or interfere with the
occupant classification system.
o Do not place any objects that may cause
magnetic fields near the front seats.
These may cause a malfunction of the
seat position sensor.
NOTE:
o Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the back-
side of the sun visor.
o Advanced airbags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide
enhanced occupant protection in fron-
tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-
tended to deploy in light collisions in
which protection can be provided by the
pre-tensioner seat belt.
o If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, please
contact the Hyundai Customer Assis-
tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.
o Never lean against the door or center
console – always sit in an upright posi-
tion.
o Do not allow an adult passenger to ride
in the front seat when the “Passenger
Airbag OFF” indicator is illuminated,
because the airbag will not deploy in the
event of a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
o Never place objects over or near any
airbag module (front or side impact
airbags), because these objects can in-
jure passengers in a crash.
o Never place covers, blankets or after-
market seat warmers on the passenger
seat as these may interfere with the
occupant classification system.
o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS wiring
or other components. Injuries could
result from inadvertent deployment or
failure of the airbag to deploy in a crash.
o If the SRS airbag warning light (see pg 1-
48) remains illuminated while the vehicle
is being driven, have an authorized
Hyundai dealer inspect the airbag sys-
tem as soon as possible.
o Airbags can only be used once – have an
authorized Hyundai dealer replace the
airbag immediately after deployment.
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
35
B240A02JM
!
Rear impact
Side Impact
Rollover
WARNING:
o The SRS is designed to deploy the front
airbags only when an impact is suffi-
ciently severe and when the impact angle
is less than 30° from the forward longi-
tudinal axis of the vehicle. The front
airbags will not deploy in side, rear or
rollover impacts. Additionally, the
airbags will only deploy once. Seat belts
must be worn at all times.
o Front airbags are not intended to deploy
in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover
crashes. In addition, airbags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below the de-
ployment threshold.
!
WARNING:
o Move your seat as far back as practical
from the front airbags, while still main-
taining control of the vehicle. You and
your passengers should never sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the airbags. Im-
properly positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by inflating
airbags.
o No objects should be placed over or near
the airbag modules on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the glove box,
because any such object could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the airbags to deploy.
o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-
placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Deployed airbags WILL NOT inflate again
and will provide no protection in subse-
quent collisions.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring or other components of the SRS
system. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of the
airbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant classification sys-
tem, do not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger seat position.
A child restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case of an
accident.
o Children younger than 13 years must
always be properly restrained in the rear
seat. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. If a child over 13
must be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as possible.
o For maximum safety protection in all
types of crashes, all occupants includ-
ing the driver should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an airbag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash. Do not sit
or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag
while the vehicle is in motion.
!
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
36
!
WARNING:
The SRSCM continually monitors all elements
while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal
or near-frontal impact is severe enough to
require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on
the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position or after the engine is started, after
which the SRI should go out.
The airbag modules are located both in the
center of the steering wheel and in the front
passenger's panel above the glove box. When
the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact
to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front airbags.
B240B02JM-AAT
SRS Components and Functions
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's Airbag Module
2. Passenger's Airbag Module
3. Knee Bolster
4. Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
5. Front Impact Sensor
6. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Usage Sensors/Buckle pre-tensioner
7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Posi-
tion Sensors
8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
10.Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)
11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(Front passenger's seat only)
B240B02JM
11
1
2710
79
5
6
4
3
48
3
B240B01L
o Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
All occupants should sit upright with
the seat back in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor until the ve-
hicle is parked and the ignition key is
removed.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy very
rapidly to provide protection in a crash.
If an occupant is out of position because
of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may
forcefully contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
37
A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a
properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the
passenger's forward motion, reducing the
risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately
starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain
forward visibility, and the ability to steer or
operate other controls.
CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air
freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it
near the instrument cluster nor on the in-
strument panel surface. If there is any leak-
age from the air freshener onto these areas
(instrument cluster, instrument panel or air
ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the
liquid from the air freshener does leak onto
these areas, wash them with water immedi-
ately.
!
Passenger's Airbag
B240B01JM
B240B03L
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly
into the pad covers will separate under pres-
sure from the expansion of the airbags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full inflation of
the airbags.
B240B02L
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38
!
WARNING:
o If an airbag deploys, there may be a loud
noise followed by a fine dust released in
the vehicle. These conditions are nor-
mal and are not hazardous - the airbags
are packed in this fine powder. The dust
generated during airbag deployment
may cause skin or eye irritation as well as
aggravate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly with lukewarm water and a mild
soap after an accident in which the
airbags were deployed.
Passenger's Airbag
B240B05L
!
o The SRS can function only when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the
SRS SRI does not illuminate or contin-
uously remains on after illuminating for
about 6 seconds when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, or after
the engine is started, illuminates while
driving, the SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle immedi-
ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect
a battery terminal, turn the ignition key
to the "LOCK" position or remove the
ignition key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition
key is in the "ON" position. Failure to
heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI
to illuminate.
WARNING:
B990A03JM-AAT
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant
classification system in the front passenger's
seat.
The Occupant Classification system is de-
signed to detect the presence of a properly-
seated front passenger and determine if the
passenger's front airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not. The driver's front airbag is
not affected or controlled by the Occupant
Classification system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person that the system determines to be of adult
size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on,
B990A01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
39
!
legs comfortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator will be turned off and the front passenger's
airbag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator on the center facia panel. This system
detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates front passenger
airbags based on these conditions.
Condition and operation in the front pas-
senger occupant classification system
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as
an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may detect him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2) When a larger child who has outgrown a child
restraint system sits in the passenger seat,
the system may detect him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique and posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat.
WARNING:
Riding in an improper position or placing
weight on the front passenger's seat when
it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely
affects the occupant classification system
(OCS).
o NEVER excessively recline the front pas-
senger seatback.
B990A03O
o NEVER put a heavy load in the front
passenger seat.
B990A08O
Front
passenger
airbag
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Condition
detected by
the occupant
classification
system
1. Adult*
1
2. Child*
2
or
child restraint
system*
3
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction
in the
system
SRS
warning
light
Off
Off
Off
On
"PASSEN-
GER
AIR BAG
OFF"
indicator light
Off
On
On
On
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40
When an adult is seated in the front passenger
seat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-
tor is on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and ask
the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with
the seat back in an upright position, centered on
the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and their feet on the
floor). Restart the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow the system
to detect the person and to enable the passenger
airbag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is
still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear
seat.
- NEVER place feet on the dashboard.
B990A07O
B990A05O
- NEVER lean on the center console.
-
N
EVER
sit on one side of the front passen-
ger seat.
o NEVER sit with hips shifted towards the
front of the seat.
B990A02O
Proper position
B990A01O
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
41
!
!
NOTE:
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator
illuminates for about 4 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the "ON" position
or after the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occupant
classification sensor will then classify the
front passenger after several more sec-
onds.
CAUTION:
If the occupant classification system is not
working properly, the SRS airbag warning
light on the instrument panel will
illuminate because the passenger's front
airbags are connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a malfunc-
tion of the occupant classification system,
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator
will illuminate and the passenger's front
airbags will not inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if there is adult occupant in
the front passenger's seat. If the SRS airbag
warning light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON" position,
remains illuminated after approximately 6
seconds when the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer inspect the occupant
classification system and the SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.
!
WARNING:
o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupation classification sys-
tem, never install a child restraint system
in the front passenger's seat. A deploy-
ing airbag can forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injuries or death.
Any child under 13 years of age should
ride in the rear seat. Children too large
for child restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No matter what
type of crash, children of all ages are
safer when restrained in the rear seat.
o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator is illuminated when the front
passenger's seat is occupied by an adult
and he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor), have that
person sit in the rear seat.
o Do not modify or replace the front pas-
senger seat. Don't place anything on or
attach anything such as a blanket or
after market seat heater to the front
passenger seat. This can adversely af-
fect the occupant classification system.
WARNING:
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in
the front seat when the “PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, be-
cause the airbag will not deploy in the event
of a crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator remains illuminated after
the passenger repositions themselves prop-
erly and the car is restarted, Hyundai recom-
mends that passenger move to the rear seat
because the passenger's front airbag will
not deploy.
Front seat passengers must stay properly
seated to avoid serious injury from a de-
ploying airbag. For more information see
page 1-38.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42
B990B02JM-AAT
Side Impact Airbag
Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact
airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the
airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or
the front passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side
impact airbags are designed to deploy only
during certain side-impact collisions, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and point
of impact. The side impact airbags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact situations.
B990B02JM
!
WARNING:
o Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools
when occupying the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the occu-
pant classification system.
o Do not use accessory seat covers on the
front seats.
o Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they are restrained in the rear,
as opposed to the front seat. It is recom-
mended that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
o Airbags can only be used once – have an
authorized Hyundai dealer replace the
airbag immediately after deployment.
!
WARNING:
o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated
correctly (for example: seat excessively
reclined, leaning on the center console,
or hips shifted forward in the seat) can
cause a condition where the advanced
frontal airbag system senses less weight
than if the occupant were seated prop-
erly (sitting upright with the seatback in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and their feet on
the floor). This condition can result in an
adult potentially being misclassified and
illumination of the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
43
!
WARNING:
WARNING:
o The side impact airbag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute for
them. Your seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in motion. The
airbags deploy only in certain side im-
pact conditions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
o For best protection from the side impact
airbag system and to avoid being injured
by the deploying side impact airbag,
!
HTB072
Side airbag
sensor
both front seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steering wheel
at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.
The passenger's arms and hands should
be placed on their laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat covers.
o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-
vent the effectiveness of the system.
o Do not install any accessories on or near
the side impact airbag.
o Do not place any objects over the airbag
or between the airbag and yourself.
o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door and the
front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury
if the supplemental side impact air bag
inflates.
o To prevent unexpected deployment of
the side impact air bag that may result in
personal injury, avoid impact to the side
airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.
B990C01LZ-GAT
Curtain Airbag
Curtain airbags are located along both sides of
the roof rails above the front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the heads of
the front seat occupants and the rear outboard
seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain airbags are designed to deploy only
during certain side impact collisions, depending
on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.
The curtain airbags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
situations.
HJM2056
Curtain Airbag
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44
!
o If your car was flooded and has soaked
carpeting or water on the floor, don't try
to start the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not replace the bumper or the bumper
guard with the one other than the Hyundai
genuine parts. Otherwise, it can ad-
versely affect SRS performance and lead
to an increased risk of injury.
WARNING:
o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has
been moistened with plain water. Sol-
vents or cleaners could adversely affect
the airbag covers and proper deploy-
ment of the system.
o No objects should be placed over or near
the airbag modules on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the glove box,
because any such object could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the airbags to inflate.
o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-
placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring, or other components of the SRS
system. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental inflation of the airbags
or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o If components of the airbag system must
be discarded, or if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety precautions
must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer
knows these precautions and can give
you the necessary information. Failure
to follow these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of personal
injury.
!
WARNING:
!
WARNING:
o Do not install a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat position.
A child restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case of an
accident.
o Modification to SRS components or wir-
ing, including the addition of any kind of
badges to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure, can ad-
versely affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
B240C02JM-AAT
SRS Care
o The SRS is virtually maintenance free and
there are no parts you can safely service by
yourself. If the SRS SRI (Service Reminder
Indicator) does not illuminate, or continu-
ously remains on, have your vehicle imme-
diately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any work
on the steering wheel must be performed by
a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper
handling of the airbag system may result in
serious personal injury.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
45
B240D02JM-AAT
Additional Safety Precautions
o Never let passengers ride in the cargo
area (trunk) or on top of a folded-down
back seat. All occupants should sit upright,
fully back in their seats with their seat belts
on and their feet on the floor.
o Passengers should not move out of or
change seats while the vehicle is mov-
ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seat
belt during a crash or emergency stop can
be thrown against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of the ve-
hicle.
o Each seat belt is designed to restrain one
occupant. If more than one person uses the
same seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
o Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve occu-
pant comfort or reposition the seat belt can
reduce the protection provided by the seat
belt and increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
o Passengers should not place hard or
sharp objects between themselves and
the airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objects
on your lap or in your mouth can result in
injuries if an airbag inflates.
o Keep occupants away from the airbag
covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully
back in their seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor. If occupants are too
close to the airbag covers, they could be
injured if the airbags inflate.
o Do not attach or place objects on or near
the airbag covers. Any object attached to
or placed on the front or side impact airbag
covers could interfere with the proper opera-
tion of the airbags.
o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-
tion of the front seats could interfere with the
operation of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components or side impact
airbags.
o Do not place items under the front seats.
Placing items under the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supple-
mental restraint system sensing compo-
nents and wiring harnesses.
o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.
The infant or child could be seriously injured
or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and
children should be properly restrained in
appropriate child safety seats or seat belts
in the rear seat.
!
WARNING:
o Sitting improperly or out of position can
cause occupants to be shifted too close
to a deploying airbag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or death.
o Always sit upright with the seatback in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and your feet on
the floor.
Adding Equipment to or Modifying Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.
If you modify your vehicle by changing your
vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or
side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect
the operation of your vehicle's airbag system.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A02JM-AAT
B260A01JM-U
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
47
1. Tachometer
2. Turn Signal Indicator Light
3. Seat Belt Warning Light
4. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System
Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
5. Speedometer
6. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
7. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
8. High Beam Indicator Light
9. Fuel Gauge
10. Low Fuel Warning Light
11. Tail Gate Open Warning Light
12. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light (If installed)
13. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)
14. Immobilizer Warning Light (If installed)
15. Door Ajar Warning Light
16. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)
17. Odometer/ Trip odmeter
18. Trip Computer (If installed)
19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
20. Charging System Warning Light
21. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If installed)
22. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Indicator
(If installed)
23. Coolant Temperature Gauge
24. Cruise Indicator (If installed)
25. 4WD Lock Indicator Light
26. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
48
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260B01JM-AAT
SRS (Airbag) Service
Reminder Indicator (SRI)
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes
on for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position or after the engine
is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is not
working properly. If the SRI does not come on,
or continuously remains on after coming on for
about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition
key to the "ON" position or started the engine,
or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS
inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
B260D01A-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The blinking green arrows on the instrument
panel show the direction indicated by the turn
signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,
blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not
illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal
system is indicated. Your dealer should be
consulted for repairs.
B260E02O-AAT
Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Chime
The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seat
belt is fastened when the ignition key is turned
from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" and
the warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.
B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator Light
The high beam indicator light comes on when-
ever the headlights are switched to the high
beam or flash position.
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
CAUTION:
If the low oil pressure warning light stays on
while the engine is running, serious engine
damage may result. The oil pressure warn-
ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-
ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it
should come on when the ignition switch
is turned on, then go out when the engine
is started. If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is running, there
is a serious malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is
safe to do so, turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on with the
engine running, turn the engine off imme-
diately. In any instance where the oil light
stays on when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by a Hyundai
dealer before the car is driven again.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
49
!
B260H02A-AAT
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid
Level Warning Light
The brake fluid level warning light indicates that
the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder
is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be
added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is
found, the car should be immediately and care-
fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.
If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle
should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer
by a professional towing service.
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal
braking systems. This means you still have
braking on two wheels even if one of the dual
systems should fail. With only one of the dual
systems working, more than normal pedal travel
and greater pedal pressure are required to stop
the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a
distance with only half of the brake system
working. If the brakes fail while you are driving,
shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking
and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING:
If you suspect brake trouble, have your
brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. Driving your car with a
problem in either the brake electrical sys-
tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-
ous, and could result in a serious injury or
death.
Warning Light Operation
The parking brake/brake fluid level warning light
should come on when the parking brake is
applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"
or "START". After the engine is started, the light
should go out when the parking brake is re-
leased.
If the parking brake is not applied, the warning
light should come on when the ignition switch is
turned to "ON" or "START", then go out when
the engine starts. If the light comes on at any
other time, you should slow the vehicle and bring
it to a complete stop in a safe location off the
roadway.
B260J02A-AAT
Charging System Warning Light
The charging system warning light should come
on when the ignition is turned on, then go out
when the engine is running. If the light stays on
while the engine is running, there is a malfunc-
tion in the electrical charging system. If the light
comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the
engine and check under the hood. First, make
certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,
check the tension of the belt. Do this as shown
on page 6-20 by pushing down on the center of
the belt. Have the system checked by your
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
B260B01JM-AAT
Tail Gate Open Warning Light
This light remains on unless the tail gate and/or
tail gate window is completely closed and latched.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
50
B260L02HP-GAT
Door ajar warning light and chime
(If Installed)
The door ajar warning light warns you that a door
is not completely closed and the chime warns
you that the key is in the ignition switch.
NOTE :
The warning chime only sounds whenever
the key is in the ignition switch and the
driver's side front door is open simulta-
neously. The chime sounds until the key is
removed from the ignition switch or the
driver's side front door is closed.
!
B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The low fuel level warning light comes on when
the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it
comes on, you should add fuel as soon as
possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light
on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the catalytic
converter.
B260N01A-AAT
Malfunction Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is a malfunction
of an exhaust gas related component, and the
system is not functioning properly so that the
exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.
This light will also illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, and will go out in
a few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, or
does not illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your
nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have
the system checked.
B260P02Y-GAT
ABS Service Reminder
Indicator (If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the
Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will come on
and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI
remains on, comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the key is turned to the "ON"
position, this indicates that there may be a
problem with the ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by
your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The
normal braking system will still be operational,
but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
WARNING:
If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/
Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"
or come on while driving, there may be a
problem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake Force
Distribution).
If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have
your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.
B265C01O-AAT
Traction Control Indicator
Lights (If installed)
The traction control indicators change opera-
tion according to the ignition switch position and
whether the system is in operation or not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, but should go out
after three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFF
indicator stays on, take your car to your autho-
rized Hyundai dealer and have the system
checked. See section 2 for more information
about the TCS.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
51
B260T01O-GAT
4WD System Warning Light
(If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the
4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning light
will come on and then go off in a few seconds.
CAUTION:
If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinks
while driving, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc-
curs, have your vehicle checked by an au-
thorized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
!
B265C02LZ-AAT
Electronic Stability
Control Indicator Lights
(If installed)
The electronic stability control indicators change
operation according to the ignition switch posi-
tion and whether the system is in operation or
not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, but should go out
after three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-OFF
indicator stays on, take your car to your autho-
rized Hyundai dealer and have the system
checked. See section 2 for more information
about the ESC.
B260V01JM-GAT
4WD Lock Indicator Light
(If installed)
The 4WD (Four Wheel Drive) lock indicator light
in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the
The 4WD lock switch is pushed.
The purpose of this switch is to increase the
drive power when driving on wet pavement,
snow-covered roads and/or off-road.
The 4WD lock indicator light is turned off by
pushing the switch again.
NOTE:
Do not use 4WD on normal dry pavement
conditions.
B260R01E-GAT
SET Indicator Light
(If installed)
The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated when the cruise control switch is
pushed downward to "SET (COAST)".
The SET indicator light does not illuminate when
the control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.
B260Q01E-GAT
Cruise Indicator Light
(If installed)
The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter is illuminated when the cruise control main
switch on the end of the barrel is pushed.
When the cruise control main switch is pushed
a second time, the cruise control system will be
and the light will turn off.
Information on the use of cruise control may be
found on page 1-87.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
52
!
!
B270A01O-AAT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND
The front and rear disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-pitched
squealing or scraping noise when new pads are
needed. The sound may come and go or be
heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. It
may also be heard when the brake pedal is
pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damage
will result if the worn pads are not replaced. See
your Hyundai dealer immediately.
WARNING:
Significantly low tire pressure makes the
vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss
of vehicle control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pressure tires will
cause the tires to overheat and fail.
B260W02JM-GAT
Low tire pressure telltale
(If installed)
The low tire pressure telltale comes on for 3
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position.
If the warning light does not come on, or continu-
ously remains on after comming on for about 3
seconds when you turned the ignition key to the
"ON" position, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System is not working properly. If this occurs,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible. If the warning light illuminates while
driving, reduce vehicle speed immediately and
stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking and over-
correcting at the steering wheel. Inflate the tires
to the proper pressure as indicated on the
vehicle’s tire information placard.
B265W02JM-GAT
TPMS (Tire pressure monitor-
ing system) malfunction indica-
tor (If installed)
TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for 3
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position. If the warning light does not come
on, or continuously remains on after comming
on for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition key to the "ON" position, the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System is not working porperly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and stays on
when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not monitor the
tire pressure. Have the system checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING:
o The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and
sudden tire damage caused by external
factors.
o If you feel any vehicle instability, imme-
diately take your foot off the accelerator
and slowly move to a safe position off
the road.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
53
!
B290A02A-AAT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could erupt and cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
B280A01A-AAT
FUEL GAUGE
The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-
mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity
is given in Section 9.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
HJM2182
HJM2181
The needle on the engine coolant temperature
gauge should stay in the normal range. If it moves
across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then
open the hood and, after the engine has cooled,
check the coolant level and the water pump drive
belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, have
your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
54
B330A03A-AAT
TACHOMETER
The tachometer registers the speed of your
engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION:
The engine should not be raced to such a
speed that the needle enters the red zone
on the tachometer face. This can cause
severe engine damage and may void your
warranty.
!
B300A01A-AAT
SPEEDOMETER
Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in
miles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-
ters per hour (on the inner scale).
B300A01JM
B330A01JM
B310B02JM-GAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
B310B01JM-2
Odometer (1)
The odometer records the total driving distance
in kilometers or miles, and is useful for keeping
a record for maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Any alteration of the odometer may void
your warranty coverage.
Trip odometer (2)
o This mode indicates the drive distance trav-
elled since the last drive time reset.
o You can choose the TRIP A or TRIP B by
pressing the trip odometer switch for less
than 1 second.
(AT)
(MT)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
55
B310B02JM-C
(AT)
(MT)
(1)
(1)
TRIP COMPUTER
B400B02JM-GAT
(If installed)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-
trolled driver information gauge that displays
information related to driving, such as a tripmeter,
distance to empty, average fuel consumption
average speed, and drive time on the LCD.
Odometer (1)
The odometer records the total driving distance
in kilometers or miles, and is useful for keeping
a record for maintenance intervals.
Trip Computer Switch
HJM2185
Pushing in the trip computer switch behind the
right side of the steering wheel changes the
display as follows;
TRIPMETER A
TRIPMETER B
DISTANCE TO EMPTY
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AVERAGE SPEED
DRIVE TIME
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
56
HJM2186-C
o This mode indicates the total distance trav-
elled since the last tripmeter reset.
Total distance is also reset to zero if the
battery is disconnected.
o Pressing the trip computer switch for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter is being
displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.
o The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 miles.
o You can choose the TRIP A or TRIP B.
1. Tripmeter
Tripmeter
o This mode indicates the estimated distance
to empty from the current fuel in the fuel tank
and distance to empty symbol.
o When refueling with more than 1.6 gallons (6
liters), the trip computer will recognize refu-
eling.
o For an accurate distance to empty, drive
more than 30 miles.
o When the distance to empty is less than 30
miles, the symbol will flash and the distance
to empty digits will indicate "---" until more fuel
is added.
2. Distance to Empty
HJM2187-B
Distance to Empty
NOTE:
o The distance to empty can differ from
the actual tripmeter according to driving
conditions.
o The distance to empty can vary accord-
ing to the driving conditions, driving
pattern or vehicle speed.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
57
3. Average Fuel Consumption
o This mode calculates the average fuel con-
sumption from the total fuel used and the
distance since the last average consump-
tion reset.
o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel
consumption input.
o For an accurate calculation, drive more than
30 miles.
o The meter's working range is from 0.1 to
199.9 MPG.
o This mode indicates the average speed
since the last tripmeter reset.
o Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the engine
is running.
o The meter’s working range is from 0 to 999
MPH.
o Press the trip computer switch for more than
1 seconds, when the average speed is being
displayed, clears the average speed to "---".
4. Average Speed
HJM2187-A
Average Speed
MPH
5. Drive Time
o This mode indicates the drive time since the
last tripmeter reset.
o Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the drive
time keeps going while the engine is running.
o The meter’s working range is from 0:00 to
99:59.
o Press the trip computer switch for more than
1 second, when the drive time is being
displayed, clears the drive time to zero.
HJM2187-C
Drive Time
B400B02JM-C
Average Fuel Consumption
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58
B340C04A-AAT
Headlight Switch
To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the
end of the multi-function switch. The first posi-
tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail
lights and instrument panel lights. The second
position turns on the headlights.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON" position
to turn on the headlights.
HJM2084
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH
B340A01A-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the turn
signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing
upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on
the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically return to
the center position and turn off the turn signals
at the same time. If either turn signal indicator
light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but
does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is
a malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-
out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.
B340B01A-AAT
Lane Change Signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to a point where it begins flashing.
The lever will automatically return to the center
position when released.
HJM2089
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
59
B340D01A-AAT
High-beam Switch
To turn on the headlight high beams, push the
lever forward (away from you). The High Beam
Indicator Light will come on at the same time. For
low beams, pull the lever back toward you.
B340E01A-AAT
Headlight Flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever
toward you, then release it. The headlights can
be flashed even though the headlight switch is
in the "OFF" position.
HJM2088
Parking Light Auto Cut
o The purpose of this feature is to prevent the
battery from being discharged.
The system automatically turns off the head-
lights and parking lights when the driver
removes the ignition key and opens the
driver- side door.
o With this feature, the parking light will be
turned off automatically if the driver parks on
the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on when the
ignition key is removed, perform the follow-
ing :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again
using the light switch on the steering
column.
B340G01L-GAT
Auto Light (If installed)
To operate the automatic light feature, turn the
barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If
you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the
tail lights and headlights will be turned automati-
cally on or off according to external illumination.
HJM2085
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
60
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Rear window wiper/washer
(If installed)
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· – Spraying washer fluid
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe (If installed)
· ON – Continuous wipe
· – Wash with brief wipe
Windshield wiper/washer
Type A
Type B
Type A
Type B
B350A06JM-U/B350A07JM-U/B350A08JM-U/B350A09JM-U
B350A01JM-AAT
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
61
B350B01JM-GAT
Windshield Washer Operation
B350B03JM-U
B350A02A-AAT
Windshield wipers
B350A10JM-U
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the lever
upward and release it with the lever in the
OFF position. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is pushed up-
ward and held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same
wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light
rain or mist. To vary the speed setting,
turn the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
NOTE:
To prevent damage to the wiper system, do
not attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-
tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snow
and ice should be removed manually. If
there is only a light layer of snow or ice,
operate the heater in the defrost mode to
melt the snow or ice before using the wiper
or activate the windshield wiper blade
deicer.(If installed)
Type A
B350A11JM-U
Type B
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is
turned ON.
To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/
washer lever toward the steering wheel.
Type A
B350B05JM-U
Type B
Fast
Fast
Slow
Slow
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push the
windshield wiper and washer control lever up-
wards.
B350B04JM-U
Mist Wiper Operation
Type A
B350B06JM-U
Type B
When the washer lever is operated, the wipers
automatically three passes across the wind-
shield. The washer continues to operate until
the lever is released.
NOTE:
o Do not operate the washer more than 15
seconds at a time or when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass
prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in winter,
use windshield washer antifreeze.
B350C01O-GAT
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation
B350C02JM-U
Type A
B350C03JM-U
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
63
To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the
wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the
switch in this position, the interval between
wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18
seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.
B390A01JM-AAT
Rear Window Wiper And Washer
(If installed)
B390A02JM-U
: The rear window wiper starts to operate
three times after the washer fluid sprays
onto the rear window.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : The interval between wipes operates
every 5 seconds intermittently.
(If installed)
ON : The rear window wiper starts to operate
continuously.
: The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
rear window and the wiper operates
while the rear window wiper barrel is
placed in this position.
Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds or when the fluid reser-
voir is empty; this could damage the system. Do
not operate the wiper when the window is dry;
this can result in scratching as well as prema-
ture wiper blade wear.
Type A
B390A03JM-U
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
64
B385A01JM-AAT
Windshield wiper Blade De-icer
(If installed)
The windshield wiper blade de-icer is turned on
by pushing in the switch. To turn the de-icer off,
push the switch a second time. The windshield
wiper blade de-icer automatically turns itself off
after about 20 minutes.
HJM2101
WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH
HJM2098
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
B370A01A-AAT
The hazard warning system should be used
whenever you find it necessary to stop the car
in a hazardous location. When you must make
such an emergency stop, always pull off the
road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on by
pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all
turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning
lights will operate even though the key is not in
the ignition.
To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the
switch a second time.
HJM2097
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
B360A04A-AAT
(If installed)
To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.
They will light when the headlight switch is in the
second position and the ignition key is in the
"ON" position.
NOTE:
If you turn on the headlight high beams, the
front fog lights will be turned off.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
65
B380A02Y-AAT
Rear Window Defroster Switch
The rear window defroster and heated outside
rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the
switch. To turn the defroster off, push the switch
a second time. The rear window defroster
automatically turns itself off after about 15 min-
utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the
switch again after it has turned itself off.
HJM2104
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the rear
window defroster to operate.
CAUTION:
Do not clean the inner side of the rear window
glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from
the inner surface of the glass as this may cause
damage to the defroster elements.
!
DIGITAL CLOCK
B400A02A-AAT
There are three control buttons for the digital
clock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-
cated.
MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.
RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to
facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.
When this is done:
Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29
changes the readout to 11 : 00.
Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29
changes the readout to 12 : 00.
Push the "R" button for 5 seconds to display a
12- or 24-hour clock (If installed).
HJM2137
B380A02Y-AAT
Aux outlet (if installed)
You can use an aux outlet to connect an audio
device.
NOTE:
When using a portable audio device con-
nected to the power outlet, noise may occur
during playback. If this happens, use the
power source of the portable audio device.
HJM2101-1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
66
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
B420A01A-AAT
For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must
be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way
into its socket. When the element has heated,
the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This
can damage the heating element and create a
fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,
use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its
approved equivalent.
B420A01JM
POWER OUTLETS
B500D03JM-GAT
(If installed)
These are located in the quarter trim and on the
rear main console.
These supply 12V electric power to operate
electric accessories or equipment only when
the key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
HJM2156
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B410A01A-AAT
The instrument panel lights can be made brighter
or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light
control knob.
B410A01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
67
!
CAUTION:
o Use when the engine is running and
remove a plug from the power outlet
after using the electric appliance. Using
when the engine stops or remaining the
electric appliance with plugged in for
many hours may cause the battery to be
discharged.
o Do not use the power outlet to connect
electric accessories or equipment other
than those designed to operate on 12
volts.
o Some electronic devices can cause elec-
tronic interference when plugged into
the power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio noise and mal-
functions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
ASHTRAY / COIN TRAY
B430A01JM-AAT
The front ashtray/coin tray may be opened by
pushing and releasing the ashtray lid. To re-
move the ashtray to empty or clean it, lift the
ashtray upward and pull it out. The ashtray coin
tray light will only illuminate when the external
lights are on.
B430A01JM
HJM2159
DRINK HOLDER
!
B450A01JM-AAT
Front Drink Holder
The front drink holder is located on the main
console .
WARNING:
o Use caution when using the drink hold-
ers. A spilled beverage that is very hot
can injure you or your passengers. Spilled
liquids can damage interior trim and
electrical components.
o Do not place objects other than cups or
cans in the drink holder. The objects can
be thrown out in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68
SUNROOF
!
B460A01Y-AAT
(If installed)
Sun Shade
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sun-
shade which you can manually adjust to let in
light with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.
WARNING:
Never adjust the sunshade while driving.
HJM2029
B460B02JM-GAT
Opening the Sunroof
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you
can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof
control buttons located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or
tilted when the ignition switch is in the "ON"
position.
Sliding the sunroof
Auto slide open
To use the autoslide feature, momentarily (more
than 1 second) press the SLIDE OPEN button
on the overhead console. The sunroof will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof sliding at
any point, press any sunroof control button.
HJM2025
!
WARNING:
Do not place objects other than cups or
cans in the drink holder. This objects can be
thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring the passen-
gers in the vehicle.
B450B01JM-AAT
REAR DRINK HOLDER
(If installed)
The rear drink holders is located in the rear seat
arm rest. The rear drink holder can be used by
pulling the rear seat armrest.
HJM2160
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
69
!
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.
Auto slide close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE button
on the overhead console for more than 1 sec-
ond.
The sunroof will slide all the way close. To stop
at the desired point, press any sunroof control
button.
Auto Reverse
If an object or part of the body is detected while
the sunroof is closing automatically, it will re-
verse direction, and then stop.
Auto reverse function does not work if a tiny
obstacle is blocked between the sliding glass
and the sunroof sash. You should always check
that all passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
!
WARNING:
o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,
arms or body are between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash, as this could
result in injury.
o Do not place your head or arms out of the
sunroof opening at any time.
o While the vehicle is moving, always keep
the head, hands and other parts of the
body of all occupants away from the roof
opening. Otherwise, you could be seri-
ously injured if the vehicle stops sud-
denly or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.
!
CAUTION:
o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold
temperature or when it is covered with
ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may
have accumulated on the guide rails.
o Do not press any sunroof control button
longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system compo-
nents could occur.
WARNING:
Be careful that someone’s head, hands
and body are not trapped by a closing
sunroof.
Manual slide close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE button
on the overhead console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.
B460C01JM-AAT
Tilting the Sunroof
Auto tilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momentarily (more
than 1 second) press the TILT UP button on the
overhead console. The sunroof will tilt all the
way open. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point,
press any sunroof control button.
Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.
HJM2024
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
70
B460D03B-GAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof
If the sunroof does not electrically operate:
2. Remove the mounting screws of the front
overhead console with a (+) driver.
HJM2026
HJM2027
1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior light
lenses in the front overhead console by
using a flat blade screwdriver.
HJM2028
3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided
with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench
can be found in the vehicle's glove box.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE button
on the overhead console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.
NOTE:
After washing the car or after there is rain,
be sure to wipe off any water that is on the
sunroof before operating it.
B460E01JM-GAT
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected
or discharged, or you use the emergency handle
to operate the sunroof, you have to reset your
sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. According to the position of the sunroof, do
as follows.
1) In case that the sunroof has closed com-
pletely or been tilted : Press the TILT UP
button for 1 second.
2) In case that the sunroof has slide-opened:
Press and hold the CLOSE button for
more than 5 seconds until the sunroof
has closed completely. And then press
the TILT UP button for 1 second
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button once
again until the sunroof has returned to the
original position of TILT UP after it is raised
a little higher than the maximum TILT UP
position. When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
CAUTION:
If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operate
properly.
!
4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-
terclockwise to close the sunroof.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
71
INTERIOR LIGHT
B480B01JM-AAT
Map Light
Push in the map light switch to turn the light on
or off. This light is convenient as a map light at
night or as a personal light for the driver and the
passenger.
HJM2099
Without Sunroof
With sunroof
B490A02JM-AAT
INTERIOR LIGHT
The interior courtesy light has two buttons. The
two buttons are:
o DOOR
In the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesy
light comes on when any door is opened regard-
less of the ignition key position.
The light goes out after 30 seconds if the door
is closed.
When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the
interior light stays on for 30 seconds as long as
the door is not opened.
o ON
In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all
times. Do not leave this button pressed for an
extended period of time when the vehicle is not
running.
HJM2100
HJM2158
SPECTACLE CASE
!
B491A03O-GAT
(If Installed)
The spectacle case is located on the front
overhead console.
Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle
case.
WARNING:
Do not keep objects except spectacle in-
side the spectacle case. Such objects can
be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injuring the pas-
sengers in the vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72
HJM2145
GLOVE BOX
!
o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box
release lever.
o The glove box door can be locked (and
unlocked) with the key. (If installed)
WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box
door should be kept closed when the car is
in motion.
B500B01O-AAT
Illuminated Glove Box (If installed)
Opening the glove box will automatically turn on
the light when the multi-function switch is turned
to the first/second position.
B500A01S-AAT
!
WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop, the center
console box lid should be kept closed when
the car is in motion.
The center console box is used for storing
cassette tapes or small articles.
To use the center console box, pull up the
handle (1) or (2) lift the lid as shown.
CENTER CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
B505A02NF-GAT
Center Console Box
HJM2146
HJM2146-1
HJM2147
B505B01NF-GAT
Center Console Armrest
(If Installed)
(1)
(2)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
73
B510A01A-AAT
Manual Type
The outside rearview mirrors are equipped with
a remote control for your convenience. It is
operated by the control lever in the bottom front
corner of the window.
Before driving away, always check that your
mirrors are positioned so you can see behind
you, both to the left and right sides, as well as
directly behind your vehicle. When using the
mirror, always exercise caution when attempt-
ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind or
along side of you.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
CAUTION:
If the mirror control is jammed with ice, do
not attempt to break it free using the control
handle or by manipulating the face of the
mirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
!
B510A01JM
The center console box can be used as arm-
rest. To use the console armrest, pull out the
console box lid by pulling up the handle as
shown.
NOTE:
When not in use, always be sure it is locked
in position properly.
!
WARNING:
Do not place cups or cans in the drink
holder when the console box lid is used as
an armrest. It may result in spilling the
beverage. A spilled beverage that is very hot
can injure you or your passengers. Spilled
liquids can damage interior trim and elec-
tric components.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
74
HJM2104
!
WARNING:
Be careful when judging the size or dis-
tance of any object seen in the passenger
side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror
with a curved surface. Any objects seen in
this mirror are closer than they appear.
CAUTION:
o Do not operate the switch continuously
for an unnecessary length of time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face could
cause permanent damage. To remove
any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or
approved de-icer.
!
B510D01Y-AAT
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER
(If installed)
The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated
in connection with the rear window defroster. To
heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in
the switch for the rear window defroster. The
rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-
ing or defogging and will give you improved rear
vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the
switch again to turn the heater off. The outside
rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself
off after 15 minutes.
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
to your preferred rear vision, both directly be-
hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and
right sides.
The remote control outside rearview mirror
switch controls the adjustments for both right
and left outside mirrors.
To adjust the position of either mirror:
1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left
to activate the adjustable mechanism for the
corresponding door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-
priate perimeter switch as illustrated.
B510B01Y-AAT
Electric Type (If installed)
HJM2073
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
75
!
B510C01A-AAT
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEW
MIRRORS
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them
toward the rear.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded
rearward for parking in narrow areas.
WARNING:
Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview
mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and an acci-
dent which could cause serious injury or
death.
B510C01JM
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
B520A01A-AAT
Manual Type
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside
rearview mirror. The "night" position is selected
by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of
headlights of cars behind you is reduced.
HJM2070
B520C04JM-AAT
AUTOMATIC DIMMING REAR VIEW
MIRROR WITH COMPASS
(If installed)
1. Status Indicator LED
2. Feature Control Button
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
Automatic dimming rear view mirror controls
automatically the glare of headlights of the car
behind you when it turned on by pressing and
holding the button for more than 3 but less than
6 seconds.
It is turned off by pressing and holding the button
for same time once more.
B520C08JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the button for more than 6 but
less than 9 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display.
3. Press the button until the new zone number
appears in the display. After you stop press-
ing the button in, the display will show a
compass direction within a few seconds.
B520C06JM
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting (If In-
stalled):
Due to mirror positions being angled towards
the driver, the compass mirror can also com-
pensate for drivers seated on the Left Hand side
of the vehicle (steering wheel on the LH side of
the vehicle) or Right Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the RH side of the vehicle).
To adjust the Left Hand, “L” or Right Hand, “R”,
setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more than 12
seconds.
2. Release then press the button to toggle
between “L” and “R”.
NOTE:
This procedure also causes the compass to
be de-calibrated.
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive the ve-
hicle in 2 complete circles at less than 8km/
h (5mph).
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the button, then the vehicle's
directional heading will be displayed. Pressing
and releasing the button again will turn off the
display.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more than 9 but
less than 12 seconds. When the compass
memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the
display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less than
5mph 2 times or until the compass heading
appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed direction
and opposite direction are possible, and if
the calibration is completed, the compass
heading will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a compass
heading appears.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
77
CAUTION:
1. Do not install the ski rack, antenna, etc.
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
2. If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjust-
ment, have the compass checked at an
authorized dealer.
3. The compass may not indicate the cor-
rect compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct
compass point when the vehicle moves
to an area where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)
4. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
!
PARKING BRAKE
B530A02A-AAT
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot
brake and then without pressing the release
button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far
as possible. In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift
lever should be positioned in the appropriate low
gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P
(Park) position on automatic transaxle vehicles.
HJM3026
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply the foot
brake and pull the parking brake lever slightly.
Secondly, depress the release button and lower
the parking brake lever while holding the button.
CAUTION:
Driving with the parking brake applied will
cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and
brake rotor wear.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78
B540A01JM-AAT
SHOPPING BAG HOLDERS (If installed)
HJM2150
B540A02JM
B540B01JM-AAT
Tail gate Window
o Pull the "GLASS" release lever (1) to open
the tailgate window glass, and raise the
window open lever (2).
o To close the tail gate window, lower the tail
gate window, and it will close by itself.
To be sure the tail gate window is securely
fastened, try to pull it up again.
NOTE:
The tail gate window lock is operated in
connection with the tail gate lock. To open
the tail gate window make sure the tailgate
is unlocked with a key or the central door
locking switch.
HJM2013
(1)
(2)
!
TAIL GATE
B540A01JM-AAT
o Pull and raise the "DOOR" release lever to
open the tail gate.
o To close, lower the door, then press down on
it until it locks. To be sure the door is securely
fastened, try to pull it up again.
B540A01JM
WARNING:
The tail gate should always be kept com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.
If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust
gases may enter the car resulting in serious
illness or death to the occupants. See addi-
tional warnings concerning exhaust gases
on page 2-2.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
79
Shopping bag holders are located in the front
console and on the backside of the rear seat.
When not in use, return it to the original position.
CAUTION:
o Do not hang a bag beyond 6 Ibs (3 kg).
It may cause damage to the shopping
bag holder.
o Return it to the original position after
using the shopping bag holder.
!
HOW TO USE LUGGAGE ROOM
B650A01JM
B640A01S-AAT
CARGO SECURITY SCREEN
(If installed)
To use the security screen, pull it out of the
retractor and hook it to the anchors as illus-
trated.
B650A01S-AAT
Stowage Precautions
1. Do not place objects on the cargo security
screen. Such objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle
occupants during an accident or when brak-
ing.
!
B540C01JM-GAT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
(If installed)
Luggage compartment light has a 3-position
switch. The three positions are:
o In the "DOOR" position, the luggage com-
partment light comes on when the tail gate is
opened, then goes out when it is closed.
o In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all
times.
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all
times.
HHR2070
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80
Luggage Side Trim
B545B01JM
There are small article trays in the luggage side
trim.
B655A02JM-GAT
Covering screen (If Installed)
Covering shelf screen veils the luggage room to
hang the screen hook to a headrest pole.
While not in use, place the screen hook to the
hook holder.
B655A02JM
CAUTION:
When folding the rear seatback forward,
remove the hook from the headrest pole.
Otherwise, the covering screen may be
damaged or malformed.
!
Raise the luggage under tray cover with the grip.
HJM2168-1
2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnec-
essary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
compartment. It is designed for luggage
only.
4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle and
locate the weight as far forward as possible.
HJM2166
B545B02JM-GAT
Luggage Under Tray
There is a multipurpose tray under the luggage
mat.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
81
B540D03HP-GAT
Luggage Net (If Installed)
Some objects can be kept in the net in the
luggage compartment.
Use the luggage net on the floor or at the back
of the luggage compartment to prevent objects
from sliding.
B540D01JM
!
!
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the goods or the
vehicle, care should be taken when carrying
fragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-
partment.
WARNING:
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. AL-
WAYS keep face and body out of its path.
DO NOT use when the luggage net straps
have visible signs of wear or damage.
ROOF RACK
B630A01JM-AAT
(If installed)
If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails and
fixing components to adapt the roof rack on your
vehicle may be obtained from an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION:
o In case a sunroof is installed, do not
position roof rack loads that could inter-
fere with opening of the sunroof.
o The following specifications are recom-
mended when loading cargo or luggage.
!
HJM2162
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82
!
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT
B550A01A-AAT
In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights
on either side of the car, the high mounted rear
stoplight in the center of the rear window also
lights when the brakes are applied.
B550A01JM
165 lbs (75 kg) Evenly
Distributed
ROOF RACK
CAUTION:
o Loading cargo or luggage above 165 lbs
(75 kg) on the roof rack may damage your
vehicle.
When you carry large objects, never let
them hang over the rear or the sides of
your vehicle.
o To prevent damage or loss of cargo as
you are driving, check frequently to make
sure the luggage carrier and cargo are
still securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
o To use the roof rails as a roof rack, you
must fit the roof rails with two or more
crossrails or equivalent before carrying
cargo or luggage on the roof.
o Loading cargo or luggage exceeding the
specification on the roof rack may re-
duce the stability of your vehicle.
o Do not allow cargo loads to rest directly
on the roof of your article; cross rails
must be used.
HJM2018
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE
B560A03JM-AAT
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the
vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener
located on the front floor area on the left side of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice
has formed around it, tap lightly or push on
the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do
not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do
not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
83
B560A01JM
!
o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise
the " " light will illuminate.
o If you open the fuel filler cap during high
ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-
sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-
mal and not a cause for concern.
Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,
turn it slowly.
o Do not "top-off" after the nozzle auto-
matically shuts off when refueling.
o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-
sive materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully.
- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel
filler cap, have one's hands in contact
with metal parts away from the filler
neck to discharge static electricity.
- Do not get back in the vehicle while
refueling. Do not operate anything
that can produce static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can ignite
fuel vapors resulting in explosion.
- When using a portable fuel container
be sure to place the container on the
ground while refueling. Static elec-
tricity discharge from the container
can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
While starting refueling contact should
be maintained until the filling is com-
plete.
!
WARNING:
o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before
refueling, always stop the engine and
never smoke or allow sparks and open
flames near the filler area.
o Never operate your vehicle without a
filler cap properly installed, flammable
vapors and gasoline could leak out in
dangerous situations such as a collision
or rollover. If the filler cap must be
replaced, only use genuine Hyundai re-
placement parts.
o After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel spill-
age in the event of an accident.
- Do not use cellular phones around a
gas station. The electric current or
electronic interference from cellular
phones can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
- When refueling always shut the en-
gine off. Sparks by electrical equip-
ment of the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. After refueling,
check to make sure the fuel filler cap
is securely closed, and then start the
engine.
- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes
around a gas station. Automotive fu-
els are flammable.
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
84
2. Push the secondary latch lever to the left and
lift the hood.
HJM2022
HJM2023
HOOD RELEASE
B570A03A-GAT
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.
HJM2020
HJM2021
3. Hold the hood open with the support rod.
!
Before closing the hood, return the support rod
to its clip to prevent it from rattling. Lower the
hood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above the
closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it
locks into place.
WARNING:
o Always double check to be sure that the
hood is firmly latched before driving
away. If it is not latched, the hood could
open while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
o The support rod must be inserted com-
pletely into the hole provided in the
hood whenever you inspect the engine
compartment. This will prevent the hood
from falling and possibly injuring you.
o Do not move the vehicle with the hood
in the raised position, as vision is ob-
structed and the hood could fall or be
damaged.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the support rod has been
released prior to closing the hood.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
85
FLOOR MAT ANCHOR
!
B571A03Y-AAT
When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,
make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor in
your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
WARNING:
o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed
on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips
and interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
o Don't put an additional floor mat on the
top of the anchored floor mat, otherwise
the additional mat may slide forward and
interfere with the movement of the ped-
als.
B570A01JM-A
SUN VISOR
B580A01L-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give
the driver and front passenger either frontal or
sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out
direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sun
visor for the driver and front passenger.
NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
label containing useful information can be
found on the back of each sun visor.
B580A02JM
!
WARNING:
Do not place the sun visor in such a manner
that it obscures visibility of the roadway,
traffic or other objects.
HJM2142-1
B585BA01JM-AAT
SUN VISOR EXTENDER
Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extend-
ers that may be used when the visor is in the side
glass position.
B580B01B-GAT
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If installed)
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automati-
cally turn on the mirror light.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86
HJM2067
STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER
!
To Adjust the Steering Wheel:
1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever
by pulling it upward.
WARNING:
Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel
while driving as this may result in loss of
control of the vehicle which may cause
serious injury or death.
B600A01A-AATB580C01LZ-AAT
TICKET HOLDER
The ticket holder is provided on the front of the
sun visor for holding a tollgate ticket.
B580C01JM
FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING
LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT
A red light comes on when the front door is
opened. The purpose of this light is to assist
when you get in or out and also to warn passing
vehicles.
B620A01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
87
B610A01JM
HORN
B610A01L-GAT
Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the
horn.
HJM2043
REAR SEAT ARM REST
B611A01Y-AAT
This arm rest is located in the center of the rear
seat back.
CRUISE CONTROL
B660A02S-AAT
(If installed)
B660A01JM
Main Switch
Type A
B660A02JM
Main Switch
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88
!
B660B03E-AAT
To Set the Cruise Speed
1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the
end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illumi-
nated. This turns the system on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Push the cruise control switch downward to
"SET/COAST" or "/SET" and release it. If
the "SET/COAST" or "/SET" switch is se-
lected the "CRUISE" and "SET/COAST" or
"/SET" indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will be illuminated simultaneously.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
and the desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
5. To momently increase speed, depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to
exceed the preset speed. When you remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal, the
vehicle will return to the speed you have set.
The cruise control system provides automatic
speed control for your comfort when driving on
straight, open freeways, toll roads, or other
noncongested highways. This system is de-
signed to function above approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE:
Cruise control is not recommended for city
driving, winding roads, slippery roads,
heavy rain, or other bad weather condi-
tions.
B660B01JM
Type A
B660B02JM
Type B
WARNING:
To avoid accidental cruise control engage-
ment, keep the cruise control main switch
off when not using the cruise control.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
89
B660C04E-AAT
To Cancel the Cruise Speed
To disengage the cruise control system, pull the
control switch toward the steering wheel to the
"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the following
actions will disengage the system:
o Depress the brake pedal.
o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).
o Shift the selector lever to "P" or "N" position
(Automatic transaxle).
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25
mph (40 km/h).
o Release the main switch.
B660C01JM
Type A
B660C02JM
Type B
B660D02E-AAT
To Resume the Preset Speed
B660D01JM
Type A
B660D02JM
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90
B660E01E-AAT
To Reset at a Faster Speed
1. Push the control switch upward to the "RES/
ACC" or "+/RES" position and hold it.
2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the
control switch. While the control switch is
held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.
The vehicle will automatically resume the speed
set prior to cancellation when you push the
control switch upward to the "RES/ACC" or "+/
RES" position and release it, providing the
vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
B660F04E-AAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed
1. Push the control switch downward to "SET
/COAST" or "/SET"and hold it. The vehicle
will decelerate.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, release
the control switch. While the control switch
is pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually
decrease.
!
WARNING:
o Keep the cruise control main switch off
when not using the cruise control to
avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
o Use the cruise control system only when
traveling on open highways in good
weather.
o Do not use the cruise control when it
may not be safe to keep the car at a
constant speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
o Pay particular attention to the driving
conditions whenever using the cruise
control system.
B660B01JM
Type A
B660B02JM
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
91
!
WARNING:
o During cruise-control driving with a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift
into neutral without depressing the
clutch pedal, or the engine will be
overrevved. If this happens, depress the
clutch pedal or release the main switch.
o With the cruise control engaged, when
the brake pedal is applied, it is normal to
hear the cruise control system deacti-
vate. This is an indication of normal
system operation.
o During normal cruise control operation,
when the "SET(COAST)" is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
B710A01JM-GAT
1. Side Defroster Nozzle
2. Side Ventilators
3. Windshield Defroster Nozzles
4. Center Ventilators
B710B02O-AAT
CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in the middle
of the dashboard. To change the direction of the
air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved to " "
position. The vents are closed when the vent
knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear
of any obstructions.
B710C02HP-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on each side of
the dash board. To change the direction of the
air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are
closed when the vent knob is moved to " "
position. The vents are opened when the vent
knob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clear
of any obstructions.
B710A02JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9393
939393
B670A01JM-AAT
There are three controls and two switches for
the heating and cooling system. They are:
1. Air flow control
2. Fan speed control
3. Temperature control
4. Air intake control switch
5. Air conditioning switch
HJM2109A
HJM2116A
B670B01A-AAT
Fan Speed Control
(Blower Control)
This is used to turn the blower fan on and off and
to select the fan speed.
The blower fan speed, and therefore the volume
of air delivered from the system, may be con-
trolled manually by setting the blower control
between the "1" and "4" position.
HEATING AND VENTILATION
B670C03E-AAT
Air Intake Control
This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculating inside air.
To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh
mode, Recirculation mode) push the control
button.
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on
the button goes off when the air intake control
is fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicator
light on the button is illuminated when the air
intake control is recirculation mode.
HJM2118A
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the
vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment will be drawn
through the heating system and heated or
cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE:
It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating in "Recirculation" mode
( ) may result in fogging of the wind-
shield and side windows and the air within
the passenger compartment will become
stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode
( ) selected may result in the air within
the passenger compartment becoming ex-
cessively dry.
B670D01JM-GAT
Air Flow Control
HJM2111
HJM2110A
This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and to
direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the
floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of
the vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used to
turn the blower fan off.
Face-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be
discharged through the side and center venti-
lators.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9595
959595
HJM2114
HJM2113
Bi-Level
Air is discharged through the face vents and the
floor vents.
Floor-Level
Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-
shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle
and side ventilator.
HJM2112
Floor-Defrost Level
Air is discharged through the windshield de-
froster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster
nozzle and side ventilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C
will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96
HJM2115
Defrost-Level
Air is discharged through the windshield de-
froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.
If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will be
turned turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode
will be activated to improve windshield defrost-
ing.
MAX
A/C
B670C02JM
MAX A/C-Level
Air is discharged through the face level vents.
If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C will
turn on automatically and "Recirculation" mode
will be activated.
* The A/C or the air intake control switch
returns to its former setting.
A/C
ON
ON or OFF *
OFF
ON or OFF *
ON
ON
Air Intake
Control Switch
or
OFF
NOTE:
o The air intake control switch will change
to " " mode when the ignition switch
is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode
selected.
o When you change to another mode from
MAX A/C, the A/C and the air intake
control switch are set to the following
chart.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9797
979797
HJM2117
Cool
Warm
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
This control is used to adjust the degree of
heating or cooling desired.
B690A01E-AAT
For normal heating operation, set the air intake
control to the fresh air ( ) position and the
air flow control to the floor ( ) position.
For faster heating, the air intake control should
be set in the recirculate ( ) position.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow control to
the defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will be on
automatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-
vated.)
For maximum heat, rotate the temperature
control to "Warm".
B690A01JM-A
HEATING CONTROLS
B670C03JM
OFF
Off-Level
Air is discharged through the windshield de-
froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.
NOTE:
If the air flow control is off, the air intake
control is set to the fresh mode automati-
cally.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98
VENTILATIONBI-LEVEL HEATING
B710A01S-AATB700A02E-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating
controls. To use this feature:
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air
( ) position.
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )
position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired
speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"
and "Warm".
To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode
( ).
o To direct all intake air to the dashboard
vents, set the airflow control to "Face" ( ).
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired
speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"
and "Warm".
B700A01JM-A
B710A01JM-A
B730A01L-AAT
Operation Tips
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation sys-
tem, temporarily set the air intake control to
( ).
Be sure to return the control to ( ) when
the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in
the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert
and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn
in through the grilles just ahead of the wind-
shield. Care should be taken that these are
not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other
obstructions.
o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set
the air intake control to the fresh air ( )
position, fan speed to the desired position,
turn on the air conditioning system, and
adjust temperature control to desired tem-
perature.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9999
999999
B740C01S-AAT
Dehumidified Heating
For dehumidified heating:
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should come on at
the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode
( ).
o Set the air flow control to the "Face" ( ).
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of
the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to provide the
desired amount of warmth.
B740B01S-AAT
Air Conditioning Operation for
Cooling
To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:
o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut off
outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-
ing the switch. The air conditioning indicator
light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode
( ).
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"
provides maximum cooling. The tempera-
ture may be moderated by moving the con-
trol toward "Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
For greater cooling, turn the fan control to
one of the higher speeds or temporarily
select the "Recirculation ( )" position on
the air intake control.
B740B01JM-A
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
B740A01S-AAT
Air Conditioning Switch
(If installed)
The air conditioning is turned on or off by
pushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-
ditioning control panel.
HJM2119
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
100
B740D01A-AAT
Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when you first
get in, open the windows for a few minutes
to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air conditioning
system, keep all windows closed to keep hot
air out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift
to a lower gear. This increases engine speed,
which in turn increases the speed of the air
conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning off
to avoid the possibility of the engine over-
heating.
o During winter months or in periods when the
air conditioning is not used regularly, run the
air conditioning once every month for a few
minutes. This will help circulate the lubri-
cants and keep your system in peak oper-
ating condition.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
101101
101101101
NOTE:
When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause
fog to form on the exterior windshield because of the temperature difference. At this time set the air flow
control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.
To remove interior fog on the windshield:
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.
(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.
(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the warm.
o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
o Activate windshield wiper blade de-icer (If installed)
B720A01JM-AAT
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
B720B01JM
B720B02JM
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:
A Type
B Type
A Type
B Type
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
102
AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT
(If installed)
Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic
heating and cooling control system controlled
by simply setting the desired temperature.
TYPE A (Without A.Q.S: Air Quality System)
B970B01JM
B970B02JM
B970B01JM-GAT
Heating and Cooling Controls
1. Temperature Control Switch
2. Air Flow Control Switch
3. Display Window
4. Defroster Switch
5. Blower Fan Control Switch
6. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch
7. OFF Switch
8. Air Conditioning Switch
9. Air lntake Control Switch
10. Air Quality System Switch
(If installed)
TYPE B (With A.Q.S: Air Quality System)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
103103
103103103
Photo sensor
HJM2086
NOTE:
o If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode will
reset to Centigrade degrees.
This is a normal condition and you can
change the temperature mode from Cen-
tigrade to Farenheit as follows;
Press the "TEMP" down button and
"AUTO" button simultaneously for 3
secs. The display shows that the unit of
temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or
Fahrenheit.
(°C
°F or °F
°C)
o Never place anything covering the sen-
sor which is located on the instrument
panel to ensure better control of the
heating and cooling system.
B970C01JM-AAT
Automatic Operation
The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-
trol) system automatically controls heating and
cooling by doing as follows:
1. Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator light
will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor
and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower
speed and air conditioner will be controlled
automatically.
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired
temperature.
The temperature will increase to the maxi-
mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing the " " button.
Each push of the button will cause the tem-
perature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).
The temperature will decrease to the mini-
mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing the " " button.
Each push of the button will cause the tem-
perature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).
HJM2124
HJM2126
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104
B980B01Y-AAT
Fan Speed Control Switch
The fan speed can be set to the desired speed
by pressing the appropriate fan speed control
button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off
the fan.
HJM2123
B980A01Y-AAT
MANUAL OPERATION
The heating and cooling system can be con-
trolled manually as well by pushing buttons
other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the
system sequentially works according to the
order of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are not se-
lected will be controlled automatically.
Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to
automatic control of the system.
B670C03Y-AAT
Air Intake Control Switch
(Without A.Q.S)
This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculation inside air.
To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh
mode, Recirculation mode) push the control
button.
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the
button goes on when the air intake control is
fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator
light on the button is illuminated when the air
intake control is recirculation mode.
B670C01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
105105
105105105
B980C02JM-GAT
Air Intake Control Switch
(With A.Q.S) (If installed)
This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculate inside air automatically.
: OFF
: ON
Fresh Mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is
heated or cooled according to the function
selected.
Recirculation Mode :
Air from within the passenger compartment will
be drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to the function selected.
Exhaust Gas Cutoff Mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( )
is automatically converted to the ( ) mode,
to prevent exhaust gas from entering the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in recirculation
mode ( ) will give rise to misting of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use of
the air conditioning with the recirculation
mode ( ) selected may result in the air
within the passenger compartment becom-
ing excessively dry.
B980C01JM
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the
vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, and air
from within the passenger compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE:
It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "recirculation"
mode will give rise to fogging of the wind-
shield and side windows and the air within
the passenger compartment will become
stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode
selected may result in the air within the
passenger compartment becoming exces-
sively dry.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106
B980D01Y-AAT
Heating and Cooling System Off
Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of
the heating and cooling system.
!
CAUTION:
If the windows fog up with the Recircula-
tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air
intake control to the Fresh air position or
A.Q.S control to "OFF".
HJM2111
B980E01E-GAT
Air Flow Control
HJM2128
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be
directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or
windshield. Four symbols are used to represent
Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air
position.
Face-Level
When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicator
light will come on, causing air to be discharged
through the face level vents.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
107107
107107107
HJM2113
HJM2112
Floor-Level
When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, the
indicator light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the floor vents, windshield
defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.
Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, the
indicator light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the windshield defrost vents,
the floor vents and side defroster nozzle and
side ventilator .
HJM2114
Bi-Level
When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-
tor light will come on and the air will be dis-
charged through the face vents and the floor
vents.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)
B760A05E-AAT
(If installed)
The climate control air filter is located in front of
the blower unit behind the glove box.
It operates to decrease the amount of pollutants
entering the car.
To replace the climate control air filter, refer to
the page 6-17.
CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles
(15,000 km) or once a year. If the car is
being driven in severe conditions such
as dusty, rough roads, more frequent
climate control air filter inspections and
changes are required.
o When the air flow rate is suddenly de-
creased, the system should be checked
by an authorized dealer.
!
B760A01E
Evaporator core
Filter
Heater core
Outside air
Inside air
Inside air
Blower fan
B980F01JM-GAT
Defrost Switch
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the ( )
mode will be automatically selected and the air
will be discharged through the windshield de-
frost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-
tioning will operate if ambient temperature is
higher than 2°C, and automatically turns off if the
ambient temperature drops below 2°C.
B980F01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
109109
109109109
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
How Car Audio Works
AM broadcasts can be received at greater
distances than FM broadcasts. This is because
AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-
cies. These long, low frequency radio waves
can follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstructions so that
they can provide better signal coverage.
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from
transmitter towers located around your city.
They are intercepted by the radio antenna on
your car. This signal is then received by the
radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached your
vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio
system ensures the best possible quality repro-
duction. However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such as the
distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of
buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-
cies and do not bend to follow the earth's
surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-
erally begin to fade at short distances from the
station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by
buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a problem exists
with your radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
Ionosphere
B750A02L
AM reception
Mountains
Buildings
Unobstructed
area
FM radio station
B750A03L
Ionosphere
FM reception
B750A01L
Obstructed area
Iron bridges
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110
o Fading - As your car moves away from the
radio station, the signal will weaken and
sound will begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another stronger
station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large
obstructions between the transmitter and
your radio can disturb the signal causing
static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this effect until the
disturbance clears.
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-
ens, another more powerful signal near the
same frequency may begin to play. This is
because your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs, select
another station with a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being
received from several directions can cause
distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from the same
station, or by signals from two stations with
close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has passed.
B750A04L
B750A05L
!
B750B05Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
noise may be produced from the audio equip-
ment. This does not mean that something is
wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
WARNING:
Hyundai recommends that you never use a
cell phone while driving. This could result
in loss of control, and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or property
damage. You must stop at a safe place to
use a cellular phone.
NOTE:
Some states and cities have regulations
prohibiting the use of cell phones while
driving. You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your area.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
111111
111111111
AUDIO SYSTEM
PA710E01JM-GAT
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA 710S) (If installed)
A-200JMU
1. FM Selection Button
2. AM Selection Button
3. XM Selection Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
6. Power ON/OFF
7. MUTE Button
8. SCAN Button
9. Information Display Button
10. SET UP Button
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
13. Preset Button
1
2
7
8
5
6
13
11
12
10
9
4
3
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112
1. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and FM2
when the button is pressed each time.
2. AM Selection Button
Turns to AM mode, and toggles in the order of
AM1AM2···AM1···when the button is
pressed each time.
3. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the order of
XM1XM2XM3···XM1··· when the button
is pressed each time.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it turns to CD
mode, and if a device is connected to AUX then
it toggles.
CDAUXCD··· when the button is pressed
each time.(It will not turn to AUX if the auxiliary
device is not connected)
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed, it
reduces the band frequency by 200khz to
automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is found.
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed, it
increases the band frequency by 50khz to
automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is found.
6. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control
Button
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button is turned
to the right, it increases the volume and left,
decreases the volume.
7. MUTE Button
Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.
8. SCAN Button
If this button is pressed, the frequencies will
become increased and receive the correspond-
ing broadcasts.
This function will play the frequencies for 5
seconds (XM MODE : 10 seconds) each and
find other broadcasts as the frequency in-
creases.
Press the button again when desiring to con-
tinue listening to the currently playing broad-
cast.
9. Information Display Button
Information Display function operation (Infor-
mation is displayed each time (the) Key is
pressed) : Pressing the Category Channel
Name Artist NameSong TitleCategory-
KEY for 3 seconds will display the correspond-
ing text then become restored.
Text Scroll operation
After pressing (the) Key, if the text to be dis-
played is longer than the LCD text line, then
rotating the Tune Knob will operate the Page up
function displaying 8 characters for 3 seconds
each - displays the maximum lines of text
supported by XM.
10. SET UP Button
Press this button to turn to the XMoption, SCROLL
and adjustment mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after pressing
the button, it will return to the play mode.(After
entering SET UP mode, move between items
using the left, right and PUSH functions of the
TUNE button.)
The set up item changes from AUDIO adjust-
ment, TEXT SCROLL, XM setup.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
113113
113113113
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise by one notch
to increase frequency by 0.05Mhz from current
frequency.
Turn this button counterclockwise by one notch
to decrease frequency by 0.05Mhz from cur-
rent frequency.
Press this button while holding SET UP button
to activate / inactivate the item to.
Select SET UP item using left and right function
of the Tune button.
Pressing the changes the BASS, MIDR- ANGE,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio
control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-RANGE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to emph- asize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound (left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be at-
tenuated).
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
Moves [CAT ] Button when Category Up
search operation.
o Category is moved Up from the category
currently being received and Category Name
becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will be
restored.
o If the Key is pressed while in the last Cat-
egory, then the first category will become
displayed and operation will be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be selected by
pressing ENTER.
Moves [CAT ] Button when Category Down
search operation.
o Category is moved Down from the category
currently being received and Category Name
becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will be
restored.
o If the [CAT ] Key is pressed while in the
first Category, then the last category will
become displayed and operation will be re-
peated.
o Corresponding category can be selected by
pressing ENTER.
13. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 seconds to
play the channel saved in each button.
Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds or longer
to save current channel to the respective button
with a beep.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114
PA710F01JM-GAT
CD (PA 710S) (If installed)
A-201JMU
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Indicator
3. CD Eject Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
6. INFO Button
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
8. RANDOM Play Button
9. REPEAT Button
10. SCAN Play Button
11. FOLDER Button
1
3
5
8
7
11
2
6
4
9
10
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
115115
115115115
1. CD Loading Slot
Please face printed side upward and gently
push in. When the ignition switch is on ACC or
ON and power is off, power is automatically
turned on if the CD is loaded. This CDP supports
both 8cm and 12 cm CDs. But if VCD, Data CD,
MP3 CD are loaded, "Er-6" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
2. CD Indicator
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON and if the
CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted. If the CD
is ejected the light is turned off.
3. CD Eject Button
Push button to eject the CD during CD
playback. This button is enabled when ignition
switch is off.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it turns to CD
mode, and if a device is connected to AUX then
it toggles.
CDAUXCD··· when the button is pressed
each time.(It will not turn to AUX if the auxiliary
device is not connected)
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play from the beginning of cur-
rent song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds and press again within 1 seconds
to play the previous song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer to
initiate reverse direction high speed sound
search of current song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play the next song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer to
initiate high speed sound search of current
song.
6. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current CD
TRACK in the order of DISC TITLE DISC
ARTISTTRACK TITLE TRACK ARTIST
TOTAL TRACK Play Screen DISC
TITLE···.(not displayed if the information is not
available on the DISC.)
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display songs
after current song.
Also, turn this button counterclockwise to dis-
play songs before current song.
To listen to the displayed song, press the button
to skip to the song and play.
Pressing the changes the BASS, MIDR- ANGE,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio
control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-RANGE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to emph- asize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound (left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be at-
tenuated).
8. RANDOM Play Button
Turns on/off the randomization of the play list of
files in the currently played DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once again.
9. REPEAT Button
Repeats current song when the button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds.
Repeats the entire DISC when the button is
pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.
10. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in the DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once again.
11. FOLDER Button
Folder up/down operation.
o Folder is moved up or down from currently
playing and folder name becomes displayed.
o Press enter key to play the selected folder.
o If the enter key is not pressed with in 5
seconds, then the previous folder name will
be displayed again.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
117117
117117117
PA760E01JM-GAT
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA 760S) (If installed)
A-300JMU
1. FM Selection Button
2. AM Selection Button
3. XM Selection Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
6. Power ON/OFF
7. MUTE Button
8. SCAN Button
9. Information Display Button
10. SET UP Button
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
13. Preset Button
1
2
7
8
5
6
13
11
12
10
9
4
3
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118
1. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and FM2
when the button is pressed each time.
2. AM Selection Button
Turns to AM mode, and toggles in the order of
AM1AM2···AM1···when the button is
pressed each time.
3. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the order of
XM1XM2XM3···XM1··· when the button
is pressed each time.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it turns to CD
mode, and if a device is connected to AUX then
it toggles.
CDAUXCD··· when the button is pressed
each time.(It will not turn to AUX if the auxiliary
device is not connected)
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed, it
reduces the band frequency by 200khz to
automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is found.
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed, it
increases the band frequency by 50khz to
automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is found.
6. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control
Button
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button is turned
to the right, it increases the volume and left,
decreases the volume.
7. MUTE Button
Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.
8. SCAN Button
If this button is pressed, the frequencies will
become increased and receive the correspond-
ing broadcasts.
This function will play the frequencies for 5
seconds (XM MODE : 10 seconds) each and
find other broadcasts as the frequency in-
creases.
Press the button again when desiring to con-
tinue listening to the currently playing broad-
cast.
9. Information Display Button
Information Display function operation (Infor-
mation is displayed each time (the) Key is
pressed) : Pressing the Category Channel
Name Artist NameSong TitleCategory-
KEY for 3 seconds will display the correspond-
ing text then become restored.
Text Scroll operation
After pressing (the) Key, if the text to be dis-
played is longer than the LCD text line, then
rotating the Tune Knob will operate the Page up
function displaying 8 characters for 3 seconds
each - displays the maximum lines of text
supported by XM.
10. SET UP Button
Press this button to turn to the XMoption, SCROLL
and adjustment mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after pressing
the button, it will return to the play mode.(After
entering SET UP mode, move between items
using the left, right and PUSH functions of the
TUNE button.)
The set up item changes from AUDIO adjust-
ment, TEXT SCROLL, XM setup.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
119119
119119119
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise by one notch to
increase frequency by 0.05Mhz from current
frequency.
Turn this button counterclockwise by one notch
to decrease frequency by 0.05Mhz from cur-
rent frequency.
Press this button while holding SET UP button
to activate / inactivate the item to.
Select SET UP item using left and right function
of the Tune button.
Pressing the changes the BASS, MIDR- ANGE,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio
control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-RANGE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to emph- asize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound (left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be at-
tenuated).
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
Moves [CAT ] Button when Category Up
search operation.
o Category is moved Up from the category
currently being received and Category Name
becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will be
restored.
o If the Key is pressed while in the last Cat-
egory, then the first category will become
displayed and operation will be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be selected by
pressing ENTER.
Moves [CAT ] Button when Category Down
search operation.
o Category is moved Down from the category
currently being received and Category Name
becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will be
restored.
o If the [CAT ] Key is pressed while in the
first Category, then the last category will
become displayed and operation will be re-
peated.
o Corresponding category can be selected by
pressing ENTER.
13. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 seconds to
play the channel saved in each button.
Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds or longer
to save current channel to the respective button
with a beep.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120
PA760F01JM-GAT
CDC (PA 760S) (If Installed)
A-301JMU
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. LOAD Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
6. INFO Button
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
8. RANDOM Play Button
9. REPEAT Button
10. DISC Selection Button
11. SCAN Play Button
12. FOLDER Button
1
2
5
8
7
12
3
6
4
9
10
11
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
121121
121121121
1. CD Loading Slot
Please face printed side upward and gently
push in. When the ignition switch is on ACC or
ON and power is off, power is automatically
turned on if the CD is loaded. This CDP supports
both 8cm and 12 cm CDs. But if VCD, Data CD,
MP3 CD are loaded, "Er-6" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
2. CD Eject Button
Push button to eject the CD during CD
playback. This button is enabled when ignition
switch is off.
3. CD LOAD Button
Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to available
CDC deck (from 1~6). Push [LOAD] button for
more than 2 seconds to load into all available
decks.
The last CD will play. 10 seconds idle status will
disable loading process.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it turns to
AUX MODE to play the sound from the auxiliary
player.
If no auxiliary device is connected, it displays
""NO MEDIA"" for 5 seconds and returns to the
previous mode."
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play from the beginning of cur-
rent song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds and press again within 1 seconds
to play the previous song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer to
initiate reverse direction high speed sound
search of current song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play the next song.
o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer to
initiate high speed sound search of current
song.
6. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current CD
TRACK in the order of DISC TITLE DISC
ARTISTTRACK TITLE TRACK
ARTISTTOTAL TRACKPlay Screen DISC
TITLE···.(not displayed if the information is not
available on the DISC.)
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display songs
after current song.
Also, turn this button counterclockwise to dis-
play songs before current song.
To listen to the displayed song, press the button
to skip to the song and play.
Pressing the changes the BASS, MIDR- ANGE,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio
control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-RANGE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-
wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to emph- asize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound (left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be at-
tenuated).
8. RANDOM Play Button
Turns on/off the randomization of the play list of
files in the currently played DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once again.
9. REPEAT Button
Repeats current song when the button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds.
Repeats the entire DISC when the button is
pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.
10. DISC Selection Button
o [DISC ] Change Button
Changes disc to the previous disc.
o [DISC ] Change Button
Changes disc to the next disc.
11. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in the DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once again.
12. FOLDER Button
Folder up/down operation.
o Folder is moved up or down from currently
playing and folder name becomes displayed.
o Press enter key to play the selected folder.
o If the enter key is not pressed with in 5
seconds, then the previous folder name will
be displayed again.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
123123
123123123
INDICATION
Er2
Er3
Er6
Er8
HHH
no CD
B890A01Y-AAT
AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
SOLUTION
After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.
Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.
CAUSE
CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)
FOCUS ERROR
DATA READ ERROR
DISC ERROR
TAPE DECK ERROR
TAPE EJECT ERROR
TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH
NO DISC IN MAGAZINE
NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
124
CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS
B850A02L
B850A02F-AAT
Proper Handling
Storage
When not in use, place your discs in their
individual case and store them in a cool place
away from the sun, heat, and dust.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand
while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism.
Keep Your Discs Clean
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the
disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-
prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,
it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do
not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the
disc. Do not write on the disc.
Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or
cracked discs. These could severely damage
the playback mechanism.
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc
could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.
Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.
If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean
soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent
to wipe it clean. See drawing.
B860A01A-AAT
Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend
the tape life and increase your listening enjoy-
ment. Always protect your tapes and cassette
cases from direct sunlight, severely cold and
dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes
should always be stored in the original protec-
tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot
or cold, allow the interior temperature to become
more comfortable before listening to your cas-
settes.
B850A01L
B860A01L
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
125125
125125125
o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose
or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape
surfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-
tric motors, speakers or transformers away
from your cassette tapes and tape player
unit.
Head
Cotton applicator
B860A01JM
B860A02L
o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-
ers will develop a coating of tape residue that
can result in deterioration of sound quality,
such as a wavering sound. They should be
cleaned monthly using a commercially avail-
able head cleaning tape or special solution
available from audio specialty shops. Follow
the supplier's directions carefully and never
oil any part of the tape player unit.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound
on its reel before inserting in the player.
Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind
up any slack.
o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player
when not being played. This could damage
the tape player unit and the cassette tape.
o We strongly recommend against the use of
tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).
Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin
and do not perform as well in the automotive
environment.
o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the
open side facing down to prevent dust from
settling in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay
one given tune or tape section. This can
cause poor tape winding to occur, and even-
tually cause excessive internal drag and
poor audio quality in the cassette. If this
occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by
fast winding the tape from end to end several
times. If this does not correct the problem,
do not continue to use the tape in your
vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
126
CAUTION:
o Be sure to remove the antenna before
washing the car in an automatic car
wash or it may be damaged.
o Before entering a place with a low height
clearance, be sure to adjust the roof
antenna low.
o In some vehicles, the antenna can be
folded into only front position.
o When reinstalling your antenna, it is
important that it is fully tightened to
ensure proper reception.
!
ANTENNA
B870D02JM-U
B870D02JM-AAT
Roof Antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM
and FM broadcast signals.
This antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn the antenna counterclock-
wise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna
clockwise.
NOTE:
Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape
is loose, tighten it by turning one of the
hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label
is peeling off, do not put it in the drive
mechanism.
Do not leave tapes sitting where they are
exposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,
such as on top of the dashboard or in the
player. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature before
putting it in the player.
B860A03L
Type A Type B
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2
Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-4
Key Positions ................................................................ 2-5
Starting .......................................................................... 2-6
Manual Transaxle ......................................................... 2-7
Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-9
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-13
Traction Control System (TCS) .................................. 2-13
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............................... 2-15
Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-16
4WD Lock System ...................................................... 2-19
Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-21
Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-22
Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-23
Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-26
Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-29
2
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
C010A02JM-AAT
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked
as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage
any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air
intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear
of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
!
!
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings
in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
3
!
!
WARNING:
o The 2WD Tucson is not designed for off-
road use. The 4WD Tucson is designed
primarily for use on paved roads. How-
ever, occasional use in off-highway con-
ditions such as established unpaved
roads and non-challenging off-road
trails is allowed. The 4WD Tucson is not
designed for blazing new trails, chal-
lenging off-road conditions, or unpaved
hill climbing. Exceeding the conditions
that were intended for the vehicle's pri-
mary design may result in injury or death.
o Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
o Utility vehicle have higher ground clear-
ance and a narrower track to make them
capable of performing in a wide variety
of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center
of gravitiy than ordinary cars. An advan-
tage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road allowing you to
anticipate problem. They are not de-
signed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles
any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily un-
der off-road conditions. If at all possible,
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, fail-
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
o In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING:
RISK OF ROLLOVER
!
WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-
signed to provide for safe ride and handling
capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel
that is different from the one that is origi-
nally installed on your vehicle. It can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to equip
all four tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and load-
carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-
cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/
wheel combination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you should
not use these tires for highway driving.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4
TO START THE ENGINE
C030A01E-AAT
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual
transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and
depress the clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,
place the shift lever in "P" (park).
o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and
turn it to the "START" position. Release it as
soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the
key in the "START" position for more that 15
seconds.
NOTE:
o For safety, the engine will not start if the
clutch pedal is not depressed fully
(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever is
not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic
Transaxle).
o The ignition key cannot be turned from
"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-
less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)
position or the negative battery terminal
is disconnected from the battery. To
remove the key, always confirm that the
shift lever is securely positioned in "P"
(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).
o For additional information about start-
ing, see page 2-6.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
C020A04A-AAT
Before you start the engine, you should always:
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are
no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other
indications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be sure the
parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.
4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors
are clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to
be sure they are in their proper positions.
6. Lock all the doors.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all
other occupants have fastened theirs.
8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are
not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",
check that all appropriate warning lights are
operating and that you have sufficient fuel.
10.Check the operation of warning lights and all
bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.
!
WARNING:
o All passengers must be properly belted
whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to
pages: 1-18 through 1-24 for more infor-
mation on their proper use.
o Always check the surrounding areas near
your vehicle for people, especially chil-
dren, before putting a car into 'drive.'
!
WARNING:
Always wear appropriate shoes when oper-
ating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,
etc.) may interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator pedal, and the
clutch (if installed).
!
WARNING:
When you intend to park or stop the vehicle
with the engine on, be careful not to de-
press the accelerator pedal for a long period
of time. It may overheat the engine or ex-
haust system and cause fire.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
5
KEY POSITIONS
C040A02A-AAT
CAUTION:
The engine should not be turned off or the
key removed from the ignition key cylinder
while the car is in motion. The steering
wheel is locked by removing the key.
!
o "START"
The engine is started in this position. It will crank
until you release the key.
C040A01E-1
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
NOTE:
Do not hold the key in the "START" position
for more than 15 seconds.
o "ON"
When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignition
is on and all accessories may be turned on. If
the engine is not running, the key should not be
left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the
battery and may also damage the ignition sys-
tem.
o "ACC"
With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-
trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-
ated.
o "LOCK"
The key can be removed or inserted in this
position.
To protect against theft, the steering wheel
locks by removing the key.
NOTE:
If difficulty is experienced in turning the
ignition key to the START position, turn the
steering wheel right and left to release the
tension and then turn the key.
C070C01E-1
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
C070C01A-AAT
To remove the ignition key
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition
key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-
tion to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"
position.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
6
!
4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position
and release it when the engine starts.
After the engine has started, allow the engine
to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing
the vehicle in gear.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-
onds between starting attempts to protect
the starter from overheating.
C050B02JM-AAT
Normal Conditions:
The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the
gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral
or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in
"P" (park) position.
3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"
position, make certain all warning lights and
gauges are functioning properly before start-
ing the engine.
WARNING:
Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed
when starting a manual transaxle vehicle.
Your manual transaxle equipped vehicle
will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
!
C050A01E-1
STARTING
!
C050A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed to
move your car in or out of the area. The
carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless
and can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING:
Always fully depress the brake pedal before
and while shifting out of the "P" Park posi-
tion into another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
7
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSAXLE
NOTE:
o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after your
car is completely stopped. Then move
the lever into the reverse position.
o During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not harm-
ful to the transaxle.
o If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),
put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position
and release the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal down, and then shift into 1st or
R(Reverse) gear position.
o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest
during driving, as this can result in pre-
mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.
CAUTION:
When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth
gear, caution should be taken not to inad-
vertently press the gear lever sideways in
such a manner that second gear is en-
gaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause
the engine speed to increase to the point
that the tachometer will enter the red-zone.
Such over-revving of the engine may cause
engine damage.
!
C070A02A-AAT
Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-
ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-
printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to
either a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-
plished.
HJM3017
C070B02A-AAT
Using the Clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way to the
floor before shifting, then released slowly. The
clutch pedal should always be fully returned to
the original position. Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving. This can cause un-
necessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car
on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.
Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the
car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
8
!
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured or killed
than a properly belted occupant.
o Avoid high speeds when cornering or
turning.
o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes or
fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at high-
way speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-
way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
C070D02O-AAT
Recommended Shift Points
The shift points as shown on the chart are
recommended for optimum fuel economy and
performance.
Shift
from-to
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
Recommended
mph (km/h)
15 (20)
25 (40)
35 (55)
45 (75)
C070D04O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never take the car out of gear and coast
down a hill. This is extremely hazardous.
Always leave the car in gear.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them
to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when
you are driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you do this,
engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.
This will help avoid over-revving the engine,
which can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.
This gives you much better control of your
car.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before
you attempt to shift into reverse. The
transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To
shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,
then shift to the reverse position.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a
slippery surface. Be especially careful when
braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-
hicle speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out of
control.
o Optimum vehicle performance and economy
is obtained by smoothly depressing and
releasing the accelerator pedal.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
9
HJM3018
OPERATING THE AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
C090A01O-GAT
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle
has four forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are selected au-
tomatically, depending on the position of the
speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2
gates; the main gate and the manual gate.
NOTE:
For information on manual gate operation,
refer to "Sports Mode".
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4
positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid
inadvertent selection.
NOTE:
Depress the brake pedal and push the
button when shifting.
Push the button when shifting.
The selector lever can be shifted freely.
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the
battery has been disconnected, may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-
tion, and the shifting sequence will adjust
after shifts are cycled a few times by the
T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).
C090A01JM
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the selector lever position when the
ignition is switched "ON". During "D" range
operation, green lights indicate the gear cur-
rently in use.
CAUTION:
Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the
vehicle is moving.
!
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10
!
C090E02O-AAT
o D(Drive):
Use for normal driving. Bring the car to a
complete stop before shifting the selector to "D"
position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a four gear sequence.
C090D02O-AAT
o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,
which means that no gears are engaged. The
engine can be started with the shift lever in "N"
position, although this is not recommended
except if the engine stalls while the car is
moving.
C090B02A-AAT
The function of each position is as fol-
lows:
o P (Park):
Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or
while starting the engine. Whenever parking the
car, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-
tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to
a complete stop before shifting the selector
lever to "R" position.
CAUTION:
Never place the selector lever in the "P"
(Park) position unless the vehicle is fully
stopped. Failure to observe this caution
will cause severe damage to the transaxle.
C090F01JM-GAT
Sports Mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,
sports mode is selected by pushing the selector
lever from the "D" position into the manual gate.
To return to "D" range operation, push the
selector lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-
wards and forwards can make gearshifts simple.
UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up
one gear.
DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to
shift down one gear.
SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwards
or backwards twice, it is possible to skip one
gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.
HJM3020
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
11
!
o To maintain the required levels of ve-
hicle performance and safety, the sys-
tem may not execute certain gearshifts
when the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on a
slippery road, push the selector lever
forward into the +(UP) position. This
causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd
gear which is better for smooth driving
away on a slippery road. Push the selec-
tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift
back to 1st gear.
CAUTION:
o In sports mode, The driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing road
conditions, taking care to keep the en-
gine speed below the red zone. For en-
gine protection, upward shifts are made
automatically when the engine rpm
reaches the red zone.
o By rapidly moving the selector lever back-
wards (-) twice, it is possible to skip one
gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Since
sudden engine braking and/or rapid ac-
celeration can cause a loss of traction,
however, downshifts must be made care-
fully in accordance with the vehicle's
speed.
NOTE:
o In sports mode, only the four forward
gears can be selected. To select reverse
or park, move the selector lever to the "R"
or "P" position as required.
o In sports mode, downward shifts are
made automatically when the vehicle
slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st
gear is automatically selected.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE:
o For smooth and safe operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-
tral" position or "Park" position to a
forward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the "ON"
position and the brake pedal fully de-
pressed in order to move the shift lever
from the "P" (Park) position to any of the
other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R",
"N", "D" position to "P" position. The
vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid
transaxle damage.
!
C090I04L-GAT
CAUTION:
o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" position only
when the vehicle has completely
stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse
or any of the forward positions with the
brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when shift-
ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position.
o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in
place of the parking brake. Always set
the parking brake, shift the transaxle
into "P" (Park) position and turn off the
ignition when you leave the vehicle, even
momentarily. Never leave the vehicle
unattended while the engine is running.
o When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2nd gear while in Sport
mode will help prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards.
o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level
regularly, and add fluid as necessary.
o See the maintenance schedule for the
proper fluid recommendation.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12
!
C090N05O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"
or "N" to any other position with the accelera-
tor pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"
when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before
you attempt to shift into "R" or "D".
o Never take the car out of gear and coast
down a hill. This may be extremely hazard-
ous. Always leave the car in gear when
moving.
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction. Instead,
when you are driving down a long hill, slow
down and shift to a lower gear. When you do
this, engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.
Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-
gaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-
pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep
the car from moving.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a
slippery surface. Be especially careful when
braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-
hicle speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out of
control.
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured or killed
than a properly belted occupant.
o Avoid high speeds when cornering or
turning.
o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes or
fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at high-
way speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-
way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
o Optimum vehicle performance and economy
is obtained by smoothly depressing and
releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to
rock the vehicle free by moving it forward
and backward. Do not attempt this proce-
dure if people or objects are anywhere near
the vehicle. During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move forward of
backward as it becomes unstuck, causing
injury to nearby people or damage to ob-
jects.
!
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
13
!
WARNING:
ABS / TCS / ESC will not prevent accidents
due to improper or dangerous driving ma-
neuvers. Even though vehicle control is
improved during emergency braking, al-
ways maintain a safe distance between you
and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during extreme road
conditions.
The braking distance for cars equipped
with an anti-lock braking system / TCS / ESC
may be longer than for those without it in
the following road conditions. During these
conditions the vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
o With tire chains installed.
o On roads where the road surface is pit-
ted or has different surface height.
The safety features of an ABS / TCS / ESC
equipped vehicle should not be tested by
high speed driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself or others.
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM (TCS)
C300A03Y-GAT
(If installed)
C300A01JM-U
On slippery road surfaces, the traction control
system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from
spinning excessively, thus helping the car to
accelerate. It also helps to provide sufficient
driving force and steering performance as the
car turns.
SLIP Control
Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-
sively during starting or while making acceler-
ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the
driving force of the front wheels.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
C120A01JM-AAT
(If installed)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed
to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking
or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-
trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-
trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,
in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS
will increase vehicle control during braking.
NOTE:
o A click sound may be heard in the engine
compartment when the vehicle begins
to move after the engine is started. These
conditions are normal and indicate that
the anti-lock brake system / Traction
Control System / Electronic Stability Con-
trol is functioning properly.
o During ABS / TCS / ESC operation, a
pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal
when the brakes are applied. Also, a
noise may be heard in the engine com-
partment while braking. These condi-
tions are normal and indicate that the
anti-lock brake system / Traction Con-
trol System / Electronic Stability Control
System is functioning properly.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
14
!
Driving Hints
TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to
decelerate the car sufficiently before entering
curves.
CAUTION:
When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP con-
trol function has been activated. It also
means that the road is slippery or your car
is accelerating excessively. In this situa-
tion, gently release foot pressure from the
accelerator pedal and maintain moderate
speed.
!
WARNING:
Traction control is a driving aid; all normal
precautions for driving in inclement weath-
er and on slippery driving surfaces should
be observed.
C310B02O-AAT
TCS ON/OFF Mode
When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicator
in the instrument cluster will blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS
switch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on and
stay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control
will be deactivated. Adjust you driving accord-
ingly. To turn the system back on, press the
switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should go
off.
NOTE:
1) The TCS mode will automatically be
turned ON after the engine is turned off
and restarted.
2) When the traction control system is op-
erating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates
nothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click may be
heard from the engine compartment;
this is the sound of the traction control
being checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or fresh
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal
may not cause the engine speed to in-
crease due to TCS operation.
C310D01JM-AAT
Indicators and Warning
The indicators should illuminate when the igni-
tion key is turned to ON or START but should
go out after approximately three seconds.
If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS or
TCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3
seconds, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual conditions in the
TCS System while driving, TCS-OFF indicator
illuminates as a warning.
If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car
to a safe place and stop the engine.
Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-
OFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine
has been started, have your car checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE:
When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,
traction control is automatically deacti-
vated.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
15
!
CAUTION:
Driving with varying tire or wheel size may
cause the ESC system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they are the same
size as your original tires.
!
ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM
C310A03JM-AAT
(If installed)
C310A01JM-U
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-
nering manuevers. ESC checks where you are
steering and where the vehicle is actually going.
ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management system
to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
is an electronic system designed to help the
driver maintain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving
practices. Factors including speed, road con-
ditions and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in preventing a
loss of control. It is still your responsibility to
drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
WARNING:
Never drive too fast for the road conditions
or too quickly when cornering. Electronic
stability control (ESC) will not prevent ac-
cidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet sur-
faces can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with
ESC installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including driving
at safe speeds for the conditions.
C310B01JM-AAT
ESC ON/OFF Mode
When the ESC is operating, the ESC indicator
in the instrument cluster will blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing the ESC
switch, the ESC-OFF indicator will come on and
stay on. In the ESC-OFF mode, the stability
control will be deactivated. Adjust your driving
accordingly. To turn the system back on, press
the switch again. The ESC-OFF indicator should
go off.
NOTE:
The ESC mode will automatically be turned
ON after the engine is turned off and re-
started.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
16
C310D01JM-AAT
Indicators and Warning
The indicators should illuminate when the igni-
tion key is turned to ON or START but should
go out after three seconds.
If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESC or
ESC-OFF indicator does not go out after 3
seconds, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual conditions in the
device while driving, ESC-OFF indicator illumi-
nates as a warning.
If ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car
to a safe place and stop the engine.
Then, start the engine again to check if the ESC-
OFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine
has been started, have your car checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION
C350A02JM-AAT
(If installed)
Engine power can be delivered to all wheels.
Full-time 4WD is useful when good traction is
required, such as, when driving on slippery, wet
or snow-covered roads and when moving out
of mud. Your vehicle is not designed for chal-
lenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD vehicles
are designed primarily to improve traction and
performance on paved roads and highways in
wet and/or slippery conditions. Occasional off-
road use such as established unpaved roads
and trails is considered normal use. It is always
important when traveling off-highway that the
driver carefully reduce their speed to a level that
does not exceed the safe operating speed for
those conditions. In general, off-road conditions
provide less traction and braking effectiveness
than on road conditions. These factors must be
carefully considered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving
surface and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the safety
of him/herself and his or her passengers.
!
WARNING:
This vehicle is designed primarily for on
road use. Driving the vehicle in challenging
off-road conditions may result in damage
to the vehicle. Driving in conditions that
exceed the vehicle's intended design or the
driver's experience level may result in se-
vere injury or death.
Driving 4WD Safely
(1)As always, be sure to wear the seat belt.
(2)Do not drive in challenging off-road condi-
tions or areas that exceed the vehicle's
basic design intent or the driver's experi-
ence level.
(3)Drive at lower speeds in strong crosswinds.
Because of your vehicle's higher center of
gravity, its stability will be affected in cross-
winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
control.
(4)Check the brake condition after driving in wet
or muddy conditions. Press the brake sev-
eral times as you move slowly until you feel
normal braking forces return.
(5)Do not drive the vehicle through water. (i.e.
streams, rivers, lakes, etc.)
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
17
HJM1029
Roll tester(Speedometer)
Temporary free roller
o In unavoidable cases, if the vehicle is
being towed with all four wheels on the
ground, it should only be towed forward.
o While towing, check the following items.
1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or
"ON".
2. Place the shift lever in neutral (For
Automatic Transaxle, "N" position).
3. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-
hicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not for
more than 1 mile at ANY TIME.
(8)The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot be
towed by an ordinary tow truck. Make
sure that the vehicle is towed with all
four wheels raised off the ground.
o Roadside Assistance Program:
Off-roading is not covered. To receive
service, the vehicle must be on a publicly
maintained road.
o If the vehicle is towed with only two
wheels raised off the ground, the 4WD
system could be damaged.
(6)The stopping distance of the full-time 4WD
vehicle differs very little from that of the 2WD
vehicle.
When driving on a snow-covered road or a
slippery, muddy surface, make sure that
you keep a sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the one ahead of you.
(7)Since the driving torque is always applied to
all 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time
4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the con-
dition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with four
tires of the same size and type.
o When replacement of any of the tires or
wheels is necessary, replace all of them
with tires or wheels of the same size type.
o Rotate the tires and check the tire pres-
sure at regular intervals.
!
WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-
signed to provide for safe ride and handling
capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel
that is different from the one that is origi-
nally installed on your vehicle. It can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to equip
all four tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and load-
carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-
cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/
wheel combination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you should
not use these tires for highway driving.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18
!
CAUTION:
o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being
raised on a jack, never start the engine or
cause the tires to rotate.
There is danger that rotating tires touch-
ing the ground could cause the vehicle
to go off the jack and to jump forward.
o If one of the front or rear wheels begins
to spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehicle
can sometimes be driven out by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal further;
however, avoid running the engine con-
tinuously at high rpm because doing so
could damage the 4WD system.
(10)When using tire chains, always attach them
to the front wheels.
(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in the
mud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WD
system could be damaged.
o In rare cases when it's unavoidable that
a 4WD vehicle is to be inspected on a
2WD roll tester, strictly follow the proce-
dures.
1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester as shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-
rary free roller as shown in the illustra-
tion.
!
!
WARNING:
Keep away from the front of the vehicle
while inspecting. This is very dangerous as
the vehicle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
!
WARNING:
o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane charges or
fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at high-
way speeds.
o In a collision, an unbelted person is
signicantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a person wearing a
seat belt.
o Loss of control may occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-
way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.
(9)For a speedometer test or inspection/main-
tenance (I/M) program of a Tucson 4WD
vehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamom-
eter.
CAUTION:
Never engage the parking brake while per-
forming these tests.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
19
4WD LOCK SYSTEM
C360A01O-GAT
(With Electronic Control 4WD)
(If installed)
This 4WD system is designed for dividing the
power ratio automatically in normal driving con-
ditions.
During off-road or low-friction driving condi-
tions, press the 4WD lock button to drive in full-
time 4WD, dividing the power ratio to 50:50 in the
front and rear wheels. The 4WD lock indicator
light in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
This setup begins to get cancelled when the
vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h, and the func-
tion is completely released at a speed of 40 km/
h or higher. Conversely, the function is rerun
when the speed again drops to 40 km/h or lower,
and is fully established at speeds below 30 km/
h.
To release the 4WD lock function, press the
4WD lock button again.
The 4WD lock indicator light in the instrument
cluster should go off.
C360A01JM-U
1) Pressing the 4WD lock button on the tough
terrain, the driving power is equally distrib-
uted to the front and rear.
4WD lock keeps activating when not ex-
ceeding 40 km/h.
2) Release the 4WD lock button on the normal
driving conditions.
C360A02JM
1)
2)
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
20
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
o This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades, off-road
driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads etc. to maximize traction.
o This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h) and is shifted to 4WD AUTO mode at speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h). If the vehicle decelerates to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/
h), however, the transfer mode is shifted into 4WD LOCK mode again.
o When driving in AUTO mode, the vehicle operates similar to the
conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating conditions.
However, if the system determines that there is a need for the 4WD
mode, the engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels
automatically without driver intervention.
o When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle moves
similar to the conventional 2WD vehicles.
4WD
LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
4WD LOCK
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
NOTE:
o When driving on normal roads, deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button(the indicator light goes off). Driving
on normal roads with 4WD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration
will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the
noise and vibration.
o When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power delivered entirely to the front wheels. This shock is
not a mechanical failure.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
21
GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES
C130A02A-AAT
WARNING:
o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,
always set the parking brake as far as
possible and fully engage the vehicle's
transaxle into the park position. Ve-
hicles not fully engaged in park with the
parking brake set are at risk for moving
inadvertently and injuring yourself or
others.
o All vehicles should always have the park-
ing brake fully engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement of the car
which can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
o Nothing should be carried on top of the
shelf panel behind the rear seat. If there
were an accident or a sudden stop, such
objects could move forward and cause
damage to the vehicle or injure the occu-
pants.
!
o If your car is equipped with an automatic
transaxle, don't let your car creep forward.
To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the car is
stopped.
o Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmly
engage the parking brake and place the gear
selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or
in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle).
If your car is facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help keep the
car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep the car
from rolling, block the wheels.
o Under some conditions your parking brake
can freeze in the engaged position. This is
most likely to happen when there is an ac-
cumulation of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there
is a risk that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you put the
gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in
first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with
the accelerator pedal. This can cause the
transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
o After being parked, check to be sure the
parking brake is not engaged and that the
parking brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakes
wet. They can also get wet when the car is
washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!
Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes
are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to
pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the
brakes lightly while driving slowly until the
braking action returns to normal, taking care
to keep the car under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to normal,
stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.
This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car
in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow
down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine
braking will help you maintain a safe speed.
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your
foot on the brake pedal while driving can be
dangerous because it can result in the brakes
overheating and losing their effectiveness. It
also increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply
the brakes gently and keep the car pointed
straight ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe
to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
22
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-
rectly. Improper alignment can result from
hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire
wear and may also result in other problems
as well as greater fuel consumption.
o Keep your car in good condition. For better
fuel economy and reduced maintenance
costs, maintain your car in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If
you drive your car in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required (see
Section 5 for details).
o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,
your Hyundai should be kept clean and free
of corrosive materials. It is especially impor-
tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to
accumulate on the underside of the car. This
extra weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to corro-
sion.
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-
sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),
turn off your engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
o Remember, your Hyundai does not require
extended warm-up. After the engine has
started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20
seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give your
engine a slightly longer warm-up period.
o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging
is driving too slowly in too high a gear result-
ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,
shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be
avoided by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air
conditioning system is operated by engine
power so your fuel economy is reduced
when you use it.
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY
C140A02A-AAT
You can save fuel and get more miles from your
car if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate
rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-
throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to
adjust your speed to that of the other traffic
so you don't have to change speeds unnec-
essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unneces-
sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you
drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at
a moderate speed, especially on the high-
way, is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components. In
addition, driving with your foot resting on the
brake pedal may cause the brakes to over-
heat, which reduces their effectiveness and
may lead to more serious consequences.
o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated
to the recommended pressure. Incorrect
inflation, either too much or too little, results
in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
23
SMOOTH CORNERING
C150A01A-AAT
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,
especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners
should always be taken under gentle accelera-
tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear
will be held to a minimum.
C160D01A-AAT
Check Battery and Cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the battery
system. Visually inspect the battery and cables
as described in Section 6. The level of charge
in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai
dealer or a service station.
C160C01A-AAT
Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol
Coolant
Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It
is the only type of coolant that should be used
because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-
ish your coolant in accordance with the main-
tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure that its
freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures
anticipated during the winter.
NOTE:
o Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
o Tire chains are to be used on front tires
only.
C160A01A-AAT
The more severe weather conditions of winter
result in greater wear and other problems. To
minimize the problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
C160B01JM-AAT
Snowy or Icy Conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be
necessary to use snow tires or to install tire
chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,
it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment tires. Failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous
practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking to the
fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on
snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.
You need to keep sufficient distance between
the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.
Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will provide
a greater driving force, but will not prevent side
skids.
WINTER DRIVING
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
24
C160K01A-AAT
Carry Emergency Equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather where
you drive your car, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of the items
you may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
C160H02A-AAT
Use Approved Window Washer Anti-
Freeze in System
To keep the water in the window washer system
from freezing, add an approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window washer anti-
freeze is available from Hyundai dealers and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these
may damage the paint finish.
C160G01A-AAT
To Keep Locks from Freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key
opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If
the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to
thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
C160J01A-AAT
Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate
Underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice can build
up under the fenders and interfere with the
steering. When driving in severe winter condi-
tions where this may happen, you should peri-
odically check underneath the car to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
C160I01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze
Under some conditions your parking brake can
freeze in the engaged position. This is most
likely to happen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes
or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-
rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"
(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
C160F01A-AAT
Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
System
Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-
tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Also
check all ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in
any way.
C160E01A-AAT
Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if
Necessary
In some climates it is recommended that a lower
viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold
weather. See Section 9 for recommendations.
If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,
consult your Hyundai dealer.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
25
!
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
C170A02A-AAT
Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-
tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result in
overheating and possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may
result in reduced traction or tire failure.
NOTE:
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING:
o Underinflated or overinflated tires can
cause poor handling, loss of vehicle
control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires are properly inflated
before driving. Refer to pages 2-28 and
8-3 for proper tire pressures and further
information.
o Driving on tires with no or insufficient
tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can
result in loss of vehicle control, colli-
sions, injury, and even death. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be used for
driving. Always check tire tread before
driving your car. Refer to 8-11 for further
information and tread limits.
USE OF LIGHTS
C180A01A-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correct opera-
tion and always keep them clean. When driving
during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it
is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.
This enables you to be seen as well as to see.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel than
urban motoring. Do not forget to check both
engine coolant and engine oil.
3. Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result in
overheating of the engine.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
26
C190B01S-AAT
Trailer Hitches
Select the proper hitch and ball combination,
making sure that its location is compatible with
that of the trailer or vehicle being towed.
Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-
utes the tongue load uniformly throughout the
chassis.
The hitch should be bolted securely to the car
and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT
USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY
INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT
ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.
C190C01Y-AAT
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed and
operating correctly.
NOTE:
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will
require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. See Maintenance Under
Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.
C190D01S-AAT
Safety Chains
Should the hitch connection between your ve-
hicle and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail,
the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously
across other lanes of traffic and ultimately leave
the roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-
gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-
tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,
are required in most states.
CAUTION:
o Never connect a trailer brake system
directly to the vehicle brake system.
o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in
excess of 6%) pay close attention to the
engine coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not overheat. If
the needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial towards
"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as
it is safe to do so, and allow the engine
to idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
!
TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING
!
C190A01S-AAT
If you are considering towing with your car, you
should first check with your State's Department
of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-
quirements.
Since laws vary from State to State the require-
ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask your
Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.
CAUTION:
Do not do any towing with your car during
its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order to
allow the engine to properly break in. Fail-
ure to heed this caution may result in seri-
ous engine or transaxle damage.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
27
C190E01JM
x 100 = 10% (MAX)
C190E01JM-AAT
Trailer Weight Limit
o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailer
load.
o Tongue load
o Tongue loads can be increased or de-
creased by re-distributing the load in the
trailer.
This can be verified by checking the total
weight of the loaded trailer and then checking
the load on the tongue.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load Total trailer weight
Lbs. (kg)
Tongue
150 (68)
Engine
2.0L
2.7L
2.0L
2.7L
Maximum Towable Weight
With
Brake
Without
Brake
Trailer
1500(680)
2,000(907)
1,000(454)
NOTE:
1. Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front. About 60% of
the trailer load should be in the front half
on the trailer and the remaining 40% in
the rear.
2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer
must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the
vehicle identification plate (see page 8-
2). The total gross vehicle weight is the
combined weight of the vehicle, driver,
all passengers and their luggage, cargo,
hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-
tional equipment.
3. The front or rear axle weight must not
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-
cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possible
that your towing package does not ex-
ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.
Improper trailer loading and/or too much
luggage in the cargo area can overload
the rear axle. Redistribute the load and
check the axle weight again.
!
CAUTION:
The following specifications are recom-
mended when towing a trailer. The loaded
trailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-
ues in the chart.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
28
C190F01O-AAT
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain
connections as well as proper operation of
the trailer running lights, brake lights, and
turn signals.
2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
conditions.
3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
tow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear
(manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic
transaxle).
4. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
5. Check the condition and air pressure of all
tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire
pressure can seriously affect the handling.
Also check the spare tire.
6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-
fected by crosswind and buffeting.
When being passed by a large vehicle, keep
a constant speed and steer straight ahead.
If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down
to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.
7. When parking your car and trailer, especially
on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal
precautions. Turn your front wheel into the
curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the
transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park
(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks
at each of the trailer's tires.
8. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your
vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the same time.
9. During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or
sudden stops.
11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the brakes
to overheat, resulting in reduced braking
efficiency.
13.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear
and use the engine braking effect.
When ascending a long grade, downshift the
transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed
to reduce chances of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
14.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not
hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the
accelerator. This can cause the automatic
transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake
or footbrake.
15.If the transaxle shifts frequently while going
up a hill, shift down one gear.
NOTE:
When towing check transaxle fluid more
frequently.
!
WARNING:
o Improperly loading your vehicle and
trailer can seriously affect its steering
and braking performance causing a
crash which could cause serious injury
or death.
o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-
dling and braking.
o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer
and allow more distance when braking.
o Be careful when driving in slippery and
windy conditions.
o Be careful when turning and while driv-
ing up and down hills.
o Do not exceed 45 mph or the posted
towing speed limit, whichever is lower.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
29
CAUTION:
If overheating should occur when towing,
(the temperature gauge reads near the red
zone), taking the following actions may
reduce or eliminate the problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner.
2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.
4. While in stop and go traffic, place the
gear selector in park or neutral and idle
the engine at a higher speed.
!
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
C190F03JM-AAT
Tire and Loading Information Label
I03A01JM-A
Type B
The tire label located on the driver's
side of the center pillar outer panel
gives the original tire size, cold tire
pressures recommended for your ve-
hicle, the number of people that can be
in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
860 lbs (390 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight in-
cludes the tongue load.
I030A01JM
Type A
I030A02-A
Type C
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
30
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle will
increase or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants
and the tongue load, if your vehicle is
equipped with a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1)Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds'' on your
vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Seating capacity:
Total: 5 persons
(Front seat: 2 persons,
Rear seat: 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum num-
ber of occupants including a driver,
your vehicle may carry.
However the seating capacity may be
reduced based upon the weight of all of
the occupants, and the weight of the
cargo being carried or towed. Do not
overload the vehicle as there is a limit
to the total weight, or load limit including
occupants and cargo, the vehicle can
carry.
Towing capacity:
Towing capacity is the maximum trailer
weight including its cargo weight, your
vehicle can tow. See the section "Trailer
or Vehicle Towing" for specifications
about the trailer weight.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
31
C190F01JM
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
300 lbs
(136 kg)
1100 lbs
(498 kg)
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
Available Cargo and
Luggage weight
ABC
C190F03JM
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
860 lbs
(390 kg)
540 lbs
(245 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
172 lbs (78 kg) x 5
Available Cargo Weight
Example 3
ABC
C190F02JM
Example 2
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
750 lbs
(340 kg)
650 lbs
(295 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 5
Available Cargo and
Luggage Weight
ABC
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
32
C190G03JM-AAT
Compliance Label
The compliance label is located on the
driver's side of the center piller outer
panel.
The label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-
cludes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
C190G01JM
!
This label also tells you the maximum
weights that can be supported by the
front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out
your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
WARNING:
o Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle ca-
pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-
ings can cause an accident or
vehicle damage. You can calcu-
late the weight of your load by
weighing the items (or people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading
information label for specific informa-
tion about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
33
!
WARNING:
o Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either the
maximum front or rear GAWR and
vehicle capacity weight. If you do,
parts, including tires on your ve-
hicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles and
braking ability. This could cause
you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
!
NOTE:
o Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
o Using heavier suspension com-
ponents to get added durability
might not change your weight rat-
ings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
The label will help you decide how much
cargo and installed equipment your
vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle –
like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-
thing else – they more as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, the items
will keep going and can cause an injury
if they strikes the driver or a passenger.
WARNING:
o Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible tire
failure that could lead to a crash.
o Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a crash.
o A crash resulting from poor han-
dling vehicle damage, tire failure,
or increased stopping distances
could result in serious injury or
death.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
34
!
WARNING:
Items you carry inside your vehicle
can strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
o Put things in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
o Never stack items, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle above the tops
of the seats.
o Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
o When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it.
o Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2
Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3
If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 3-5
Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-9
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-10
Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-11
If Your Car Must be Towed ......................................... 3-16
Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-18
If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-19
3
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
2
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
!
D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT
If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns
Over Slowly
D010C02Y-AAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does
Not Start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all
connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or
loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-
ment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundai
dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
D010D01A-AAT
If Engine Stalls While Driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a
straight line. Move cautiously off the road to
a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle
will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
WARNING:
If the engine will not start, do not push or
pull the car to start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other damage. In addi-
tion, push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be
sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"
and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure
they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or
goes out when you operate the starter, the
battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure
they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See
instructions for "Jump Starting".
HJM5008
D010F01A-AAT
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing,
set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and
then push the vehicle to a safe place.
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
JUMP STARTING
!
o If you should accidentally get acid on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately remove
any contaminated clothing and flush the area
with clear water for at least 15 minutes. Then
promptly obtain medical attention. If you
must be transported to an emergency facil-
ity, continue to apply water to the affected
area with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during the
jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do
not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame
in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the jump
start must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-
mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt
to use it for the jump start.
o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,
follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed in another
vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not
touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-
sories in both vehicles.
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the
exact location shown on the illustration. First,
attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post or cable of the discharged
battery.
Then attach the other end of the same cable
to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster
battery. Next, using the other cable, attach
one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable
of the booster battery. Then attach the other
end of that cable to a solid metal part of the
engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery away from the battery. Do not con-
nect the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with the booster
battery and let it run for a few minutes. This
will help to assure that the booster battery is
fully charged. During the jumping operation,
run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000
rpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery using the normal starting
procedure. After the engine starts, leave the
jumper cables connected and let the engine
run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for several
minutes.
6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order of attachment.
If you do not know why your battery became
discharged (because the lights were left on,
etc.), have the charging system checked by
your Hyundai dealer.
D020A03A-AAT
WARNING:
The gas produced by the battery during the
jump-start operation is highly explosive. If
these instructions are not followed exactly,
serious personal injury and damage to the
vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how
to follow this procedure, seek qualified
assistance. Automobile batteries contain
sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-
tective glasses and be careful not to get
acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.
HJM4001
Booster battery
Discharged
battery
3
4
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
!
!
!
WARNING:
While the engine is running, keep hair,
hands and clothing away from moving parts
such as the fan and drive belts to prevent
injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or
engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine
immediately and call the nearest Hyundai
dealer for assistance.
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be
blown out of the opening and cause seri-
ous burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-
ing, wait until the engine temperature has
returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir
(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-
ther signs of overheating. If overheating
happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION:
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a
leak in the cooling system and this should
be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai
dealer.
D030A02A-AAT
If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-
ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud
pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-
matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set
the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,
turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the car
or steam is coming out from the hood, stop
the engine. Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is
missing. If it is not missing, check to see that
it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from
the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the
air conditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it when you
stop).
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
5
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
C320A01JM
C320A02JM-AAT
(If installed)
Low Tire Pressure Telltale
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pres-
sure recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should de-
termine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your ve-
hicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
tale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is provided by a separate tell-
tale, which displays the symbol "TPMS"
when illuminated. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after re-
placing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
3
6
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!
TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring
system) malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator turns
on and stays on when there is a problem
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem. If the system is able to correctly
detect an under-inflation warning at the
same time as system failure then it will
illuminate both the TPMS malfunction
and the low tire pressure telltale e. g. if
Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS mal-
function indicator turns on, but if Front
Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning telltale is illuminated, one
or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed, avoid
hard cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar
outer panel. If you cannot reach a ser-
vice station or if the tire cannot hold the
newly added air, replace the low pres-
sure tire with the temporary spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
may turn on and the Low Tire Pressure
telltale may turn off after restarting and
about 20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low-pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure makes
the vehicle unstable and can contrib-
ute to loss of vehicle control and
increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires can cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
CAUTION - Changing tem-
peratures
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated
if the tire pressure was adjusted to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the
outside temperature is greatly higher
or lower, you should check the tire
inflation pressure and adjust the tires
to the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
!
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
7
under-inflated, the low tire pressure tell-
tale may turn on at the same time as the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
sible to determine the cause of the
problem.
NOTE:
o The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle
is moving around electric power
supply cable or radio transmitter
such as police stations, govern-
ment and public offices, broad-
casting stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
tower, etc. which can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS).
o The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
or some electronic devices, such
as notebook computer, are used
in the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
o If there is a failed tire sensor, it is
possible for the TPMS to tempo-
rarily learn a replacement sensor
if closely driven to another ve-
hicle that is also equipped with
TPMS. In rare cases, this may
temporarily delay the TPMS mal-
function indicator from turning
on.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will turn on. Have the
flat tire repaired by an authorized
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the temporary
spare tire.
NOTE:
NEVER use a puncture-repairing
agent to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire. If used, you will have
to replace the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the tire
behind the valve stem. You must use
TPMS specific wheels.
It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
After you replace the low pressure tire
with the temporary spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving.
Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated
to the recommended pressure and in-
stalled on the vehicle, the TPMS mal-
function indicator and the low tire pres-
sure telltale will be soon extinguished.
If the low pressure and TPMS malfunc-
tion indicators are not extinguished af-
ter about 20 minutes of continuous
driving, please visit an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low tire
by simply looking at it. Always use a
good quality tire pressure gauge to
measure the tire's inflation pressure.
3
8
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!
!
!
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING - TPMS
o The TPMS cannot alert you to se-
vere and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
o If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force, and
slowly move to a safe position off
the road.
WARNING:
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Please note that a tire that is hot (from
being driven) will have a higher pres-
sure measurement than a tire that is
cold (from sitting stationary for at least
3 hours and driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) during that 3 hour period). Allow the
tire to cool before measuring the infla-
tion pressure.
Always be sure the tire is cold before
inflating to the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has been
sitting for 3 hours and driven for less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour
period.
CAUTION:
Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure
sensors.
In order for the system to correctly
monitor tires for under-inflation,
there should be a total of exactly 4
sensors fitted to each of the four
driven wheel positions.
!
WARNING - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may in-
terfere with the system's ability to warn
the driver of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
There should be no other sensors in
the vehicle including spare tire po-
sition since this could cause the
system to monitor the wrong sen-
sors.
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
9
!
!
4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-
cifically designed for your vehicle, it
should not be used on any other
vehicle.
5. The temporary spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the temporary spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components
may occur.
6. The temporary spare tire pressure
should be checked once a month
while the tire is stored.
SPARE TIRE
2. The spare tire should only be used
temporarily and should be returned
to the luggage compartment as soon
as the original tire can be repaired or
replaced.
3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50
mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.
D040A02JM-AAT
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE
The following instructions for the tem-
porary spare tire should be observed:
1. Check inflation pressure as soon as
practical after installing the spare
tire, and adjust to the specified pres-
sure. The tire pressure should be
periodically checked and maintained
at the specified pressure while the
tire is stored.
Spare Tire Pressure
CAUTION:
o Do not use snow chains with your
temporary spare tire.
o Do not use more than one tempo-
rary spare tire at a time.
o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-
porary spare tire is installed.
Tire Size
Inflation Pressure
T155/90R16
T155/90D16
60 psi (420 kPa)
Type A
Type B, C
WARNING:
The temporary spare tire is for emer-
gency use only. Do not operate your
vehicle on this temporary spare at
speeds over 50 mph (80 kmh). The
original tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible to
avoid failure of the spare possibly
leading to personal injury or death.
3
10
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
D050A02A-AAT
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the car slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply
the brakes immediately or attempt to
pull off the road as this may cause a
loss of control. When the vehicle has
slowed to such a speed that it is safe
to do so, brake carefully and pull off
the road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided high-
way, do not park in the median area
between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle
in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. Change the tire following the instruc-
tions provided on the following pages.
HJM4008
4. Turn the installation bolt counter-
clockwise with a wheel nut wrench to
remove the spare tire. After replac-
ing the spare tire, install and tighten
the bolt firmly with your fingers until
there is no more play in the spare tire.
D040B02JM-GAT
Handling the Spare Tire
To remove the spare tire
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the luggage mat.
3. Remove the luggage under tray.
HJM2168-1
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
11
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
D060A02HP-AAT
The procedure described on the follow-
ing pages can be used to rotate tires as
well as to change a flat tire. When
preparing to change a flat tire, check to
be sure the gear selector lever is in "P"
(automatic) or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and that the parking brake is
set, then:
D060A01JM
!
WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide for safe ride and
handling capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and
wheel that is different from the one
that is originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel com-
bination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you
should not use these tires for high-
way driving.
Remove the spare tire and remove the
jack and tool bag from the luggage
compartment.
NOTE:
The spare tire is located under the
luggage compartment floor.
D060B01JM-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool
HJM4007
3
12
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D060E01A-AAT
4. Put the Jack in Place
The base of the jack should be placed
on firm, level ground. The jack should
be positioned as shown in the drawing.
HJM4010
D060D01A-AAT
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts
The wheel nuts should be loosened
slightly before raising the car. To loosen
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure
that the socket is seated completely
over the nut so it cannot slip off. For
maximum leverage, position the wrench
so the handle is to the left as shown in
the drawing. Then, while holding the
wrench near the end of the handle, push
down on it with steady pressure. Do not
remove the nuts at this time. Just
loosen them about one-half turn.
HJM4015
D060C02A-AAT
2. Block the Wheel
Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site from the flat to keep the vehicle
from rolling when the vehicle is raised
on the jack.
HJM4009
Flat tire
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
13
D060F03E-AAT
5. Raising the vehicle
After inserting the wrench bar into the
wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar
into the jack as shown in the drawing.
To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut
wrench clockwise. As the jack begins
to raise the vehicle, double check that
it is properly positioned and will not slip.
If the jack is on soft ground or sand,
place a board, brick, flat stone or other
object under the base of the jack to
keep it from sinking.
HFC4022
Wrench bar
Wheel nut
wrench
!
Raise the car high enough so that the
fully inflated spare tire can be installed.
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
WARNING:
Do not get under the vehicle when it
is supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the vehicle
while the jack is being used.
D060G01JM-AAT
6. Changing Wheels
Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them. Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put
the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare
tire, line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get
the top hole in the wheel lined up with
the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be slid over
the other studs.
D060G01JM
3
14
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D060H02O-AAT
7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs
and tighten them finger tight. The nuts
should be installed with their small di-
ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely seated,
then tighten the nuts as much as pos-
sible with your fingers again.
D060H01JM
!
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible severe injury. Be-
fore putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the hub
or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,
etc.) that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the hub. If
there is, remove it. If there is not
good contact on the mounting sur-
face between the wheel and hub, the
wheel nuts could come loose and
cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a
wheel may result in loss of control of
the vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING:
!
WARNING:
If the vehicle has been driven re-
cently, some pieces may be very hot.
Use caution.
D060G02JM
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
15
D060I01E-AAT
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts
Lower the car to the ground by turning
the wheel nut wrench counterclock-
wise. Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an exten-
sion pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
other nut until they are all tight. Then
double-check each nut for tightness.
HJM4016
After changing wheels, have a techni-
cian tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)
D060J02O-AAT
After Changing Wheels
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure. If
the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct
pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until
it is correct. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air
may leak from the tire. If you lose a
valve cap, buy another and install it as
soon as possible.
D060J01JM
3
16
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D080B01O-GAT
Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Vehicle
D080B03JM
Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type
truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).
1)
2)
3)
dolly
After you have changed wheels, al-
ways secure the flat tire in its place and
return the jack and tools to their proper
storage locations.
IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE
TOWED
D080A01O-GAT
If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done
by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow
truck service. This will help assure that your
vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-
sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-
erning towing. In any case, rather than risk
damage to your car, it is suggested that you
show this information to the tow truck operator.
Be sure that a safety chain system is used and
that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed
with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
with all the wheels off the ground.
!
CAUTION:
o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed
incorrectly!
o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.
o When the engine will not start, be sure
the steering is unlocked by placing the
key in the "ACC" position.
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
17
1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, be sure the parking
brake is released.
NOTE:
Before towing, check the level of the auto-
matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"
range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you
cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be
used.
2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension
components are damaged or the vehicle is
being towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
o Manual Transaxle:
If you do not use a towing dolly, place the
ignition key in the "ACC" position and put the
transaxle in "N (Neutral)".
CAUTION:
Do not tow with the key removed or in the
"LOCK" position when towing from the
rear without a towing dolly.
o Automatic Transaxle:
Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
!
!
D080A01JM
CAUTION:
o When towing the vehicle, take care not to
cause damage to the bumper or under-
body of the vehicle.
o Do not tow with sling type truck as this
may cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.
!
HJM4019
CAUTION:
A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should
never be towed from the rear with the front
wheels on the ground. This can cause se-
rious damage to the transaxle.
3) It is recommended that your vehicle be
towed with all the wheels off the ground.
3
18
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D080D01O-AAT
EMERGENCY TOWING
HJM4022
HJM4023
<Front>
<Rear>
Towing Hooks
Towing Hooks
D080B02O-AAT
Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Vehicle
D080C04JM
dolly
dolly
When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must be towed
by lifting all 4 wheels or using the towing dolly.
CAUTION:
o The 4WD vehicle should never be towed
with the wheels on the ground. This can
cause serious damage to the transaxle
or the 4WD system.
o When towing the vehicle, take care not to
cause damage to the bumper or under-
body of the vehicle.
!
D080C03JM
o Do not tow with sling type truck as this
may cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
19
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-AAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealers
can make you a new key if you have your key
number. If you lock the keys inside your car and
you cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai
dealers can use special tools to open the door
for you.
For emergency towing when no commercial
tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,
chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under
the front/rear of your vehicle. Be very careful
when attempting this procedure when the ve-
hicle is on any unpaved surface to avoid dam-
age to your vehicle.
Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,
drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-
aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in
neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine
off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine
running). A driver must be in the towed vehicle
to steer it and operate the brakes.
NOTE:
To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-
hicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and not for
more than 1 mile at ANY TIME.
4
Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2
To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2
Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3
Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5
4
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2
CORROSION PROTECTION
E020B01A-AAT
Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep
your car clean and free of corrosive materials.
Attention to the underside of the car is particu-
larly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area — where
road salts are used, near the ocean, areas
with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent corrosion.
In winter, hose off the underside of your car
at least once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when winter is
over.
o When cleaning underneath the car, give
particular attention to the components under
the fenders and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening
the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in removing
accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
E020A01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion from getting
started by observing the following:
E010D01A-AAT
Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-
sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-
rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-
larly when temperatures are just above freez-
ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is
kept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow
to dry and holds moisture in contact with the
vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it
can still retain the moisture and promote corro-
sion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corro-
sion of parts that are not properly ventilated so
the moisture can be dispersed. For all these
reasons, it is particularly important to keep your
car clean and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to the
visible surfaces but particularly to the underside
of the car.
E010C01A-AAT
High-Corrosion Areas
If you live in an area where your car is regularly
exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-
tection is particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are
road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air
and industrial pollution.
E010B01A-AAT
Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your
car are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to
accumulate underneath the car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings by
stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes
and dents which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
E010A01A-AAT
Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design and con-
struction practices to combat corrosion,
Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.
However, this is only part of the job. To achieve
the long-term corrosion resistance your
Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation
and assistance is also required.
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
3
WASHING AND WAXING
E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats and
carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the
mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-
ing materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper contain-
ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,
flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.
E020D02A-AAT
Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-
sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If
bare metal is showing through, the attention of
a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-
rosive and may damage painted surfaces in just
a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
E020C02A-AAT
Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. This creates a favorable environment
for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your car in the garage or drive it into the
garage when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-
ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
E030A03A-AAT
Washing Your Hyundai
Never wash your car when the surface is hot
from being in the sun. Always wash your car in
the shade.
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and
can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air
pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and
trim through chemical action if pollutants are
allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If
you live near the ocean or in an area where road
salts or dust control chemicals are used, you
should pay particular attention to the underside
of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust
and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven
through mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-
oughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard
direct stream of water to remove accumulations
of mud or corrosive materials. Use a good
quality car-washing solution and follow the
manufacturer's directions on the package.
These are available at your Hyundai dealer or
auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household
detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abra-
sive cleaning powders as these may damage
the finish.
Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently
and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.
For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently
and remove them a little at a time.
o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker
panels and frame members, be sure that
drain holes are kept open so that moisture
can escape and not be trapped inside to ac-
celerate corrosion.
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,
use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent
corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car
against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai
(at least once a month). Give special attention
to the removal of salt, mud and other sub-
stances on the underside of the splashboards
of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the
underside of the doors are open. Paint damage
can be caused by small accumulation of tar,
industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and
bird droppings, when not removed immediately.
If water alone is not strong enough to remove the
accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-
tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing
to remove the solution. Never allow the solution
to dry on the painted surfaces.
To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or
soapy steel-wool scouring pad.
To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean
sponge or soft cloth and water.
To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild
soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive
cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by
cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-
num is subject to corrosion, be sure to give
aluminum alloy wheels special attention in win-
ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the
wheels thoroughly afterwards.
After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If
soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will
result.
When the weather is warm and the humidity low,
you may find it necessary to rinse each section
immediately after washing to avoid streaking.
After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois
or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying
the car is to remove water from the car so it will
dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can
damage the finish.
CAUTION:
!
o Water washing in the engine compart-
ment including high pressure water
washing may cause the failure of electri-
cal circuits located in the engine com-
partment.
o Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
ojb037800
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
5
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E040A01A-AAT
To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose
dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply
a solution of mild soap or detergent and water
using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to
stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe
with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt
stains are not removed, repeat this procedure
until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-
line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-
ers.
E030E01A-AAT
Maintaining Bumpers
Special precautions must be observed to pre-
serve the appearance of the bumpers on your
Hyundai. They are:
o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or
hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you
do, wash it off immediately with clear water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-
faces. They are made of soft plastic and the
surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do
not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water
and mild soap or car-washing solution.
o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-
peratures. For example, if you have your car
repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the
car if the car is going to be placed in a high-
temperature paint booth.
E030D01A-AAT
When to Wax Again
You should polish and wax the car again when
water no longer beads on a clean surface but
spreads out over a larger area.
E030C01A-AAT
Polishing and Waxing
Always wash and dry the car before polishing
or waxing or using a combination cleaner and
wax. Use a good quality commercial product
and follow the manufacturer's directions on the
container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces
as well as the paint.
E030B01A-AAT
Spot Cleaning
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-
sive cleaning agents. These can damage the
finish of the car. To remove road tar, use
turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.
To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm
water and mild soap or car-washing solution.
Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost
its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6
ANY QUESTIONS?
E040D01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge
with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do
not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-
sive materials on the seat belts as this may
weaken the fabric.
While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-
cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of
damage and replace them if necessary.
E040C01A-AAT
Cleaning the Carpets
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of
this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid
form or powder. Read the instructions and
follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner
with the appropriate attachment, remove as
much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply
the foam following the manufacturer's direc-
tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add
water. These cleaners work best when the
carpet is kept as dry as possible.
E050A01A-AAT
If you have any questions about the care of your
car, consult your Hyundai dealer.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window cleaner on
the windows. However, when cleaning the in-
side of the rear window be careful not to damage
the rear window defroster wiring.
E040B01A-AAT
To Clean the Leather Upholstery
(If installed)
In the normal course of use, leather upholstered
surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and
dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it
may work into the surface of the leather, caus-
ing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned
when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly
with soap and water will keep your leather
lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many
years of wear.
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild
soap and lukewarm water, work up a good
lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean
with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.
Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.
During tanning operations, sufficient oils are
incorporated through processing that none need
be applied during the life of the leather. Oil
applied to the finished surface will in no way help
the leather and may do more harm than good.
Varnishes and furniture polishes should never
be used under any conditions.
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
Note : (1) When replace drive belt and inspect water pump.
(2) For every 48 months or 37,200 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first : "I"
For every 72 months or 56,000 miles (90,000 km), whichever occurs first : "R"
(3) Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).
(4) lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)
(5) For every 12 months or 10,000 miles (15,000 km) whichever occurs first :"R"
F030C03JM-AAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
GENERAL ITEMS
DRIVE BELT
COOLANT
TIMING BELT (WHEN REPLACE TIMING BELT AND INSPECT
WATER PUMP : 2.7L) (See Note (2)- 2.0 L)
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM
BALL JOINT
POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES
DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)
REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)
PROPELLER SHAFT (4WD)
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
No. DESCRIPTION
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
2.0 DOHC (ALT, W/PUMP) See Note (1)
2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)
7.5
12
6
I
15
24
12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
22.5
36
18
I
30
48
24
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
37.5
60
30
I
45
72
36
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
52.5
84
42
I
60
96
48
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
67.5
108
54
I
75
120
60
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
82.5
132
66
I
90
144
72
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
97.5
156
78
I
105
168
84
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
112.5
180
90
I
120
192
96
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
127.5
204
102
I
135
216
108
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
142.5
228
114
I
150
240
120
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
See Note (3)
See Note (4)
See Note (5)
6
Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2
General Checks ............................................................ 6-4
Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5
Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-10
Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-11
Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-12
Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-14
Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-16
Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-16
Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-17
Checking the Free-play ............................................... 6-19
Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-20
Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-21
Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-23
Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-24
Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-27
Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-34
Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-35
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01JM-GAT
(2.7 Gasoline)
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir
3. Air cleaner
4. Fuse and Relay box
5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6. Engine oil level dipstick
7. Coolant reservoir cap
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Ve-
hicle with Automatic Transaxle)
10. Radiator cap
11. Battery
G010A01JM
CAUTION:
When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects carefully
so that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.
!
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3
G010B01JM-AAT
(2.0 Gasoline)
G010B01JM
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse and Relay box
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Coolant reservoir cap
9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)
10. Radiator cap
11. Battery
CAUTION:
When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects carefully
so that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.
!
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
4
GENERAL CHECKS
G020C01A-AAT
Vehicle Interior
The following should be checked each time
when the vehicle is driven:
o Lights operation
o Windshield wiper operation
o Horn operation
o Defroster, heating system operation (and air
conditioning, if installed)
o Steering operation and condition
o Mirror condition and operation
o Turn signal operation
o Accelerator pedal operation
o Brake operation, including parking brake
o Manual transaxle operation, including clutch
operation
o Automatic transaxle operation, including
"Park" mechanism operation
o Seat control condition and operation
o Seat belt condition and operation
o Sunvisor operation
If you notice anything that does not operate
correctly or appears to be functioning correctly,
inspect it carefully and seek assistance from
your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.
G020B01A-AAT
Vehicle Exterior
The following should be checked monthly:
o Overall appearance and condition
o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque
o Exhaust system condition
o Light condition and operation
o Windshield glass condition
o Wiper blade condition
o Paint condition and body corrosion
o Fluid leaks
o Door and hood lock condition
o Tire pressure and condition
(including spare tire)
G020A01A-AAT
Engine Compartment
The following should be checked regularly:
o Engine oil level and condition
o Transaxle fluid level and condition
o Brake fluid level
o Clutch fluid level
o Engine coolant level
o Windshield washer fluid level
o Accessory drive belt condition
o Engine coolant hose condition
o Fluid leaks (on or below components)
o Power steering fluid level
o Battery condition
o Air filter condition
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
5
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
G030A01A-AAT
Engine oil is essential to the performance and
service of the engine. It is suggested that you
check the oil level at least once a week in normal
use and more often if you are on a trip or driving
in severe conditions.
G030C01JM-AAT
To Check the Oil Level
Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to
the normal operating temperature and be sure
your car is parked on level ground. Turn the
engine off.
Wait five minutes , then remove the dipstick,
wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw
it again. Then note the highest level the oil has
reached on the dipstick. It should be between
the upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW") range.
G030C01JM
DOHC V6
!
WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when checking the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
G030B01O-AAT
Recommended Oil
The engine oil quality should meet the following
classification.
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE
G030B01JM-U
NOTE:
o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-
30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred
regardless of regional option and en-
gine variation.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is
not available, secondary recommended
engine oil for corresponding tempera-
ture range can be used.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
!
CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER
If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,
add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-
clockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not
overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.
The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is
equal to about 1 quart of oil.
The engine oil and filter should be changed at
those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven
in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
The procedure for changing the oil and filter is
as follows:
1. Park the car on level ground and set the
parking brake. Start the engine and let it
warm up until the needle on the coolant
temperature gauge moves above the lowest
mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear
selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse
gear (manual transaxle).
G030D01JM-AAT
Adding Oil
G030D01JM
DOHC V6
G040A01GK
DOHC V6
G040A02JM-AAT
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
7
6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the
instructions on the carton or on the filter itself.
Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :
1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mounting
surface on the engine is clean and that the
old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate
the new gasket on the filter with clean engine
oil before installation.
7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.
8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended
engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-
ter 9 for engine oil capacity.
!
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
This product contains a chemical known to
the State of California to cause cancer.
Used engine oil may cause irritation or
cancer of the skin if left in contact with the
skin for prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-
ways protect your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after handling
used oil.
!
WARNING:
Be very careful when draining the engine oil
as it may be hot enough to burn you!
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
filler cap.
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the
drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with
a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a
drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it
drains out, then remove the drain plug.
4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace
the drain plug using a new washer and
retighten by turning it clockwise.
Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:
3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.7L)
4.0 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.0L)
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-
clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper
size. A certain amount of oil will come out
when you remove the filter. So be sure to
have your drain pan in place underneath it.
CAUTION:
Slowly pour the recommended oil using by
a funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damage
may occur if overfilled.
!
9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil
is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.
NOTE:
Always dispose of used engine oil in an
environmentally acceptable manner. It is
suggested that it be placed in a sealed
container and taken to a service station for
reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the
ground or put it in with the household
trash.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
G050B01A-AAT
Recommended Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a
50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should
be compatible with aluminum engine parts.
Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should
not be used. The cooling system must be
maintained with the correct concentration and
type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and
corrosion. Never allow the concentration of
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below
the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system
may result. For proper concentration when
adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to
the following table.
Ambient
temperature
°F (°C)
5 (-15)
-13 (-25)
-31 (-35)
-49 (-45)
65%
60%
50%
40%
35%
40%
50%
60%
Water
Antifreeze
solution
Engine Coolant concentration
G050C01A-AAT
To Check the Coolant Level
The coolant level can be seen on the side of the
plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-
ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cool. If the level
is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to
bring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,
inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid
level frequently. If the level drops again, visit
your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and
diagnosis of the reason.
CHECKING AND CHANGING THE
ENGINE COOLANT
!
G050A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the
engine coolant is under pressure and may
erupt through the opening if the cap is
removed. You could be seriously burned if
you do not observe this precaution. Do not
remove the radiator cap until the radiator is
cool to the touch.
G050C01JM
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
9
!
!
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not run-
ning. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the coolant fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature de-
creases, the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-
out pressing down on it, until it stops. This
relieves any pressure remaining in the cool-
ing system. And remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning counterclock-
wise.
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.
Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all
the engine coolant to drain from the cooling
system, then securely close the drain cock.
4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the
cooling system in your car. Then, following
the manufacturer's directions on the engine
coolant container, add the appropriate quan-
tity of coolant to the radiator.
5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized or
distilled water. Continue to add clean dem-
ineralized or distilled water in small quantities
until the fluid level stays up in the radiator
neck.
6. Start the engine, top off the radiator with
water and then add coolant to the reservoir
until the level is between "L" and "F".
7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and
check to be sure the drain cocks are fully
closed and not leaking.
G050D02A-AAT
To Change the Engine Coolant
The engine coolant should be changed at those
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.
HJM5034
G050D01JM
CAUTION:
Engine coolant can damage the finish of
your car. If you spill engine coolant on the
car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.
1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-
ing brake and remove the radiator cap when
cool.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
10
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
G080A02A-AAT
The wiper blades should be carefully inspected
from time to time and cleaned to remove accu-
mulations of road film or other debris. To clean
the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge
or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.
If the wipers continue to streak or smear the
glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai re-
placement parts or their equivalent.
!
CAUTION:
o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.
This can result in more rapid wear of the
wiper blades and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
HJM5032
HJM5038
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER
FILTER
G070A01E-AAT
To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the
cover. When this is done, the cover can be lifted
off, the old filter removed and the new filter put
in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement
Parts are recommended.
CAUTION:
o Operating your vehicle without a proper
air filter in place can result in excessive
engine wear.
o When removing the air cleaner filter, be
careful that dust or dirt does not enter
the air intake. These may result in dam-
age to the air cleaner filter.
!
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
11
G090A01JM
FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR
G090A02JM-AAT
The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the
front and rear washer systems.
A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill
the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be
checked more frequently during inclement
weather or whenever the washer system is in
more frequent use.
The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59
U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).
CAUTION:
o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washer system
because it will damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be operated if the
washer reservoir is empty. This can dam-
age the washer fluid pump.
!
!
WARNING:
o Windshield washer fluid agents contain
some amounts of alcohol and can be
flammable under certain circumstances.
Do not allow sparks or flame to contact
the washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or its
occupants could occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals. Do not drink wind-
shield washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL
(MANUAL)
G100A02JM-AAT
Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle
should be checked at those intervals specified
in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section
5.
Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF
75W/85 (API GL-4) or EQUIVALENT in the
manual transaxle.
Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity
The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.2
U.S. quarts (2.1 liters).
HJM5009
Filler plug
Drain plug
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
12
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE
FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
G110A01E-AAT
Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should
be checked at those intervals specified in the
vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
NOTE:
Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red
color. As driving distance increases, the
fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is
a normal condition and you should not
judge the need to replace based upon the
changing color.
You must replace the automatic transaxle
fluid in accordance with intervals specified
in the vehicle maintenance schedule in
section 5.
G100B01L
!
G100B02A-AAT
To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid
Level
WARNING:
It is always better to check the transaxle oil
level when the engine is cool or cold. If the
engine is hot, you should exercise great
caution to avoid burning yourself on hot
engine or exhaust parts.
Park the car on level ground with the engine off.
1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosen
the oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-
wise and remove it with your fingers.
2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel inside
the hole. The oil level should be at its bottom
edge. If it is not, check for leaks before
adding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring the
oil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches the
proper level. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in with
your fingers and then tighten securely with
the wrench.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
13
!
G110D03O-AAT
Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Level
The automatic transaxle fluid level should be
checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with the
parking brake applied and check the fluid level
according to the following procedure.
1. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral) position
and confirm the engine is running at normal
idle speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up sufficiently
(fluid temperature 158~176°F), for example
by 10 minutes usual driving, move the shift
lever through all positions then place the shift
lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park) position.
G110C01JM-AAT
Transaxle Fluid Capacity
The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is
8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).
WARNING:
The transaxle fluid level should be checked
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature. This means that the engine,
radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot
so you should exercise great care not to
burn yourself during this procedure.
HJM5011
!
G110B05A-AAT
Recommended Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially
designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE
ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP
III or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-
tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage
caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by
your new vehicle limited warranty.
CAUTION:
Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause
damage to the automatic transaxle.
Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,
DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands meeting the SP III specification ap-
proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you are
having your vehicle serviced at a facility
other than a Hyundai dealer, verify that the
correct ATF is used for your vehicle.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
14
3. Confirm if the fluid level is in “HOT” range on
the level gauge. If the fluid level is lower, add
the specified fluid from the fill hole. If the fluid
level is higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold condition
(fluid temperature 68~86°F), add the fluid to
the “COLD” line and then recheck the fluid
level according to the above step 2.
HJM5044
CHECKING THE BRAKES
!
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not run-
ning. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan, so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature de-
creases, the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.
HOT
G120A01A-AAT
CAUTION:
Because brakes are essential to the safe
operation of the car, it is suggested that
they be checked and inspected by your
Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be
checked and inspected for wear at those
intervals specified in the vehicle mainte-
nance schedule in Section 5.
!
COLD
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
15
!
G120B01A-AAT
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake fluid. It
can damage your vision if it gets into your
eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's
paint if spilled on it and not removed imme-
diately.
G120D01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level
G120C02A-AAT
Recommended Brake Fluid
Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking
system. Follow the instructions printed on the
container.
The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should
be checked periodically. The level should be
between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the
"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to
"MAX". Do not overfill.
HJM5007
!
G120E02A-AAT
Adding Brake Fluid
WARNING:
Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage
your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a
sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can
or reservoir to remain open any longer than
required. This will prevent entry of dirt and
moisture which can damage the brake sys-
tem and cause improper operation.
To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt then
unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the
recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not
overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-
voir and tighten.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
16
!
G130B02A-AAT
To Replace the Fluid
Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT
3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. The
reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid
contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
NOTE:
Do not allow any other liquids to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.
WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake fluid. It
can damage your vision if you get it in your
eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's
paint if spilled on it and not removed imme-
diately.
AIR CONDITIONING CARE
G140A01A-AAT
Keeping the Condenser Clean
The air conditioning condenser (and engine
radiator) should be checked periodically for
accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.
These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-
ficiency. When removing such accumulations,
brush or hose them away carefully to avoid
bending the cooling fans.
HJM5007
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID
G130A01A-AAT
To Check the Clutch Fluid
The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder
should be checked when performing other un-
der hood services. The system should be
checked for leakage at the same time. Check
to make certain that the clutch fluid level is
always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level
markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.
Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system
which should be inspected and repaired imme-
diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
17
G190A01GK
DOHC CVVT V6
Water Pump Pulley
0.2~0.24 in.
(5~6 mm)
Power steering
COMP
Auto
tensioner
Alternator Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley
Alternator
Eng.pulley
G140D02A-AAT
Checking the Compressor Drive Belt
!
G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the
system, the air conditioning should be run for at
least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly
important during cool weather when the air
conditioning system is not otherwise in use.
G140B01A-AAT
Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-
tion
1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for
several minutes with the air conditioning set
at the maximum cold setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is
not cold, have the air conditioning system
inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION:
Running the air conditioning system for
extended periods of time with a low refrig-
erant level may damage the compressor.
When the air conditioning is being used regu-
larly, the compressor drive belt tension should
be checked at least once a month with the
engine turned off.
To check the drive belt tension, press down on
the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft
and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your
finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt
anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is too
loose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.
CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-
TROL AIR FILTER
B145A03JM-GAT
(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
(If Installed)
The climate control air filter is located in front of
the evaporator unit behind the glove box.
It helps to decrease the amount of pollutants
entering the car.
1. Open the glove box and remove the support
strap through the hole.
HJM2133
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
18
3. Remove the climate control air filter cover by
pressing both side's clips.
HJM2135
4. Remove the climate control air filter by lifting
it.
5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-
bly.
2. Lower the glove box down completely by
pushing the both sides of the glove box
inward.
HJM2136 HJM2134
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
19
G150A01JM
!
B145A01JM
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the air conditioner filter in
the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise,
noise or filter damage may result.
CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY
G150A01A-AAT
STEERING WHEEL
To check the steering wheel free-play, stop the
car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and
gently move the steering wheel back and forth.
Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive
to changes in resistance that mark the limits of
the free-play. If the free-play is greater than
specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai
dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
1.18 in.
(30 mm)
G160A01HR
G160A01A-AAT
CLUTCH PEDAL FREE PLAY
With the engine off, press lightly on the clutch
pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This
is the clutch pedal free-play. The free-play
should be within the limits specified in the illus-
tration. If it is not, have it inspected by your
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if
necessary.
0.24 ~ 0.51 in.
(6 ~ 13 mm)
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
20
G190A01GK
DOHC CVVT V6
Water Pump Pulley
0.2~0.24 in.
(5~6 mm)
Power steering
COMP
Auto
tensioner
Alternator Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley
Alternator
Eng.pulley
CHECKING DRIVE BELTS
Drive belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the
same time, belts should be examined for cracks,
wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration
and replaced if necessary.
Belt routing should also be checked to be sure
there is no interference between the belts and
other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,
the new belt should be adjusted again after two
or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from
initial stretching after use.
G190A01A-AAT
G180A01L
G160A01HR
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
CLEARANCE
G180A01A-AAT
You need a helper to check the brake pedal
clearance. With the engine running, have your
helper press down on the brake pedal several
times and then hold it down with a force of about
110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-
ance is the distance from the top surface of the
brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the
floor mat.
If the brake pedal clearance is not within the
limits specified in the illustration, have it in-
spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted
or repaired if necessary.
2.95 in. (75 mm)
G170A01A-AAT
BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
With the engine off, press down on the brake
pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the
brake booster.
Then, using your hand, press down slowly on
the brake pedal until you feel a change in
resistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.
The free-play should be within the limits speci-
fied in the illustration above. If it is not, have it
inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted
or repaired if necessary.
0.12 ~ 0.31 in.
(3 ~ 8 mm)
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
21
CHECKING AND REPLACING
FUSES
!
G200B02JM-AAT
Replacing Accessory Fuses
CAUTION:
When replacing a fusible link, never use
anything but a new fusible link with the
same or lower amperage rating. Never use
a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.
This could result in serious damage and
create a fire hazard.
The fuse box for the lights and other electrical
accessories will be found on the left side of
crash pad. Inside the box you will find a list
showing the circuits protected by each fuse.
If any of your car's lights or other electrical
accessories stop working, a blown (open) fuse
could be the reason. If the fuse has opened, you
will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has
melted through. If you suspect a blown fuse,
follow this procedure:
G200A03A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link
A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from
the battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-
ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This
could be caused by a short in the system
drawing too much current.) If this ever happens,
have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,
repair the system and replace the fusible link.
The fusible links are located in a relay box in the
engine compartement for easy inspection.
HJM4002
G200A01JM
Open-
Replace
Good
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
22
G200B02L
!
4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new
fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse
should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse
clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.
If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be
able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower
rating from an accessory you can tempo-
rarily get along without (the radio or cigarette
lighter, for example). Always remember to
replace the borrowed fuse.
CAUTION:
An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-
lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace a
fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory
is turned on, the problem is serious and
should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for
diagnosis and repair. Never replace a fuse
with anything except a fuse with the same
or a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-
ity fuse could cause damage and create a
fire hazard.
NOTE:
See page 6-35 for the fuse panel descrip-
tions.
Good Open-Replace
1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.
2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.
Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you
(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the
relay and fuse box of the engine room to
simplify this operation).
3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you
find one that appears to have opened.
G200B01JM
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
23
CHECKING THE BATTERY
!
G210A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Batteries can be dangerous! When working
with batteries, carefully observe the follow-
ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.
The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution
of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly
corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or
the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,
immediately do the following:
HJM5008
!
G210B03A-AAT
Checking the Battery
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-
sion around the battery posts or terminals
should be removed using a solution of house-
hold baking soda and warm water. After the
battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light
coating of grease.
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the
affected areas with water for at least 15
minutes and then seek medical assistance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your
eyes with water and get medical assistance
as soon as possible. While you are being
driven to get medical assistance, continue to
rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft
cloth saturated with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large
quantity of water or milk followed by milk of
magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable
oil. Get medical assistance as soon as
possible.
While batteries are being charged (either by a
battery charger or by the vehicle's generator),
they produce explosive gases. Always ob-
serve these warnings to prevent injuries from
occurring:
o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated
area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in
the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer. Wash hands after handling.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
24
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
G230A03A-AAT
G220C01A-AAT
Checking Condenser Cooling Fan
The condenser cooling fan should come on
automatically whenever the air conditioning is in
operation.
The power steering fluid level should be checked
regularly. To check the power steering fluid
level, be sure the engine is "OFF", then check
to make certain that the power steering fluid
level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level
markings on the fluid reservoir.
NOTE:
Grinding noise from the power steering
pump may be heard immediately after the
engine is started in extremely cold condi-
tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops during
warm up, there is no abnormal function in
the system. It is due to a power steering
fluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-
tions.
G220B01A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan
The engine cooling fan should come on auto-
matically if the engine coolant temperature is
high.
CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING
FANS
!
G220A01A-AAT
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not run-
ning. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan, so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature de-
creases the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.
G230A01JM
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
25
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
6. Draw a vertical line (through the center of
each headlight beam pattern) and a horizon-
tal line (through the center of each headlight
beam pattern) on the aiming screen.
And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21
mm) under the horizontal line.
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the
parallel line with a phillips screwdriver -
VERTICAL AIMING.
G290A03O-AAT
Before performing aiming adjustment, make
sure of the following.
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press
the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-
eral times.
Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)
from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for
full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and
spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver
or equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.
4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the
headlights (Low beam).
5. Open the hood.
G250A01A-AAT
FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR HYUNDAI
If you desire additional information about main-
taining and servicing your Hyundai, you may
purchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundai
dealer's parts department. This is the same
manual used by dealership technicians and
while it is highly technical it can be useful in
obtaining a better understanding of your car and
how it works.
G240A01A-AAT
POWER STEERING HOSES
It is suggested that you check the power steer-
ing hose connections for fluid leakage at those
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.
The power steering hoses should be replaced
if there is severe surface cracking, pulling,
scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose
could cause premature failure.
Recommended Fluid
Use PSF-3 type fluid
NOTE:
Do not start the engine when the power
steering oil reservoir is empty.
G290A01JM
Vertical
aiming
Horizontal
aiming
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
26
SPECIFICATION:
"H";
Horizontal center line of headlights from
ground: 35.6 in.(904 mm)
"W";
Distance between each headlight center:
53.4 in.(1,356 mm)
"L";
Distance between the headlights and the
wall that the lights are tested against:
118 in. (3,000 mm).
G290B01JM-AAT
Adjustment After Headlight Assembly
Replacement
If the vehicle has had front body repair and the
headlight assembly has been replaced, the
headlight aiming should be checked using an
aiming chart as shown in the illustration. Turn on
the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)
1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is
parallel to center line of the body and is
aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center
of headlights.
G290B01B
L
W
H
Cut-off
line
Ground line
"P"
Horizontal line
Vertical
line
30 mm
!
WARNING:
Never attempt to adjust the horizontal align-
ment of your headlights. Horizontal aiming
must be adjusted by an authorized Hyundai
dealer to avoid incorrect alignment that will
reduce the effectiveness of your headlights.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
27
REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS
!
G260A02A-AAT
Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be sure
the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
The next paragraph shows how to reach the
light bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to
replace the burned-out bulb with one of the
same number and wattage rating.
See page 6-34 for the wattage description.
CAUTION:
o Keep the lamps out of contact with pe-
troleum products, such as oil, gasoline,
etc.
o After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could ap-
pear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an Authorized Hyundai Dealer.
HJM5013
G270A02O-AAT
Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,
avoid touching the glass.
4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,
remove the headlight assembly mounting
bolts.
HJM5012
5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
28
8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlight
bulb.
9. Remove the protective cap from the re-
placement bulb and install the new bulb by
matching the plastic base with the headlight
hole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-
nect the connector.
10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-
ly dispose of the old bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim.
12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,
remove from the bulb holder and install the
new bulb. Do not touch the glass of the new
bulb.
HJM5018
HJM5016
HJM5017
6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
7. Disconnect the connector from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
29
G270B01JM-AAT
Rear Combination Light
!
WARNING:
This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-
sure and if impacted could shatter, result-
ing in flying fragments. Always wear eye
protection when servicing the bulb. Protect
the bulb against abrasions or scratches
and against liquids when lighted. Turn the
bulb on only when installing in a headlight.
Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.
Keep the bulb out of the reach of children
and dispose of the used bulb with care.
G270A03O
HJM5020
HJM5021
HJM5022
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the mounting screws as shown
with a phillips screwdriver.
3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/
tail light, turn signal light, back-up light, side
mark light), take it out from the bulb holder by
turning it counterclockwise.
(1) Stop/Tail light
(2) Turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
4. Install the new bulb.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
30
G270C02TB-GAT
Luggage Compartment Light
(If Installed)
G270C01JM
1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw
driver.
G270I02JM-GAT
Front fog Light (If installed)
HJM5047
1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw
driver.
2. Remove the bolts with a wrench.
3. Disconnect the power cord.
HJM5049
HJM5050
4. Replace to the new bulb.
HJM5048
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
31
G270C02JM-AAT
Cargo Light
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-
driver.
3. Replace to the new bulb.
HTB284
2. Disconnect the power cord.
G270C02JM
HJM5023
HJM5024
3. Replace with a new bulb.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
32
G270G01O-AAT
Interior Light
1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-
driver.
HJM5025G270E01JM
G270E01O-AAT
Front Side Marker Light
1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw-
driver.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Replace with a new bulb.
G270E02HR
G270E03HR
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
33
G270H01O-AAT
Glove Box Illuminated Light (If installed)
1. Open the glove box.
2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-
driver.
HJM5026
HJM5045
2. Replace with a new bulb.
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Replace with a new bulb.
HJM5039
HTB284
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
34
BULB WATTAGE
G280A02JM-AAT
G280A01JM-U
Part Name
Front Postion Light
Glove Box Illuminated Light
Head Light (Low/High)
Interior Light
Front Fog Light (If installed)
Turn Signal Light
Side Marker
Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wattage
5
10
55/60
10
10
27
21
5
5
Wattage
10
5
21
21
5
21/5
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Part Name
Cargo Light
High Mounted Rear Stop Light
Luggage Compartment Light
Turn Signal Light
Back-up Light
License Plate Light
Stop/Tail Light
Map Light
Room Light
A TYPE
B TYPE
2.4
5
Socket type
S8.5/8.5
LED
S8.5/8.5
BA 15s
W2.1x9.5D
S8.5/8.5
BAY 15d
Socket type
W2.1x9.5d
-
P43t
W2.1x9.5D
S8.5/8.5
PGJ13
BA15s
W2.1x9.5D
W2.1x4.6D
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
35
FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
G200C01JM-GAT
Engine Compartment
G200C01JM
NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the
fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
FUSE
RATING
30A
30A
50A
50A
30A
40A
30A
30A
15A
10A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Start relay, Ignition switch
Engine control, Fuel pump , A/C, Generator, ATM
Ignition switch, Power connector
Cooling fan
ABS, ESC
ABS, ESC
Blower
Ignition switch, Power connector
Injector
Cooling fan, Stop lamp switch, Oxygen sensor, ECM/PCM
DRL
Front fog lamp
Horn, Siren
A/C
Head lamp (HIGH)
Head lamp (LOW)
IGN
ECU
BATT #1
C/FAN
ABS #1
ABS #2
BLOWER
BATT #2
INJ
SNSR
DRL
F/FOG
HORN
A/CON
H/LP (HI)
H/LP (LOW)
FUSIBLE
LINK
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
36
G200E01JM-AAT
Inner Panel
G200E02JM
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
37
FUSE
P/WDW-LH
P/WDW-RH
TAIL RH
RR HTR
A/BAG
CLUSTER
TAIL LH
AUDIO
C/LIGHTER
& P/OUTLET
SPARE
RR FOG
HTD MIRR
AUDIO
IG COIL
IMMO
P/OUTLET
S/HTR
A/CON SW
START
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Left power window
Right power window
Right rear combination lamp, Glove box lllumination
Rear defogger
SRS control
Instrument cluster, ETACM/TACM
Left head lamp, Left rear combination lamp, License lamp
Digital clock, Audio, Power outside mirror folding module, Power outside mirror & mirror folding switch
Cigarette lighter
(SPARE)
Rear fog lamp
Left/Right power outsider mirror & mirror folding motor, Rear defogger switch
Audio
Ignition coil (2.7 L)
Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)
Rear power outlet
(Not used)
Seat warmer
A/C control module (Manual A/C)
Theft alarm relay, Transaxle range switch, lgnition lock switch
FUSE
RATING
30A
30A
10A
30A
15A
10A
10A
10A
20A
15A
10A
10A
10A
20A
10A
15A
10A
20A
10A
10A
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
38
FUSE
IG-SW
ROOM LP
AMP
T/SIG
A/BAG IND
RR WIPER
A/CON
IGN
HAZARD
S/ROOF
STOP
H/FREE
ECU
FF WIPER
4WD
DEICER
TCU
ABS
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Ignition switch
Room lamp, A/C control module, Digital clock, ETACM/TACM Key remind switch
Audio
Hazard switch, Auto light & Photo sensor, Transaxle range switch
Instrument cluster
Safety relay
Sunroof controller, A/C control module, Blower relay, ETACM/TACM
PTC heater relay, Fuel filter heater relay, DRL CONTROL MODULE, head LAMP RELAY
Hazard switch, Hazard relay, Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)
Sunroof, Door lock/unlock relay
Stop lamp switch, Power outside mirror folding module
(Not used)
Cruise control, Stop lamp, TCS, ESC, 4WD ECM, ECM, PCM, TCM, Vehicle speed sensor
Front wiper, Multifunction switch
4WD/ECM
Windshield defogger
TCM (2.7 L)
G-Sensor, ESC, ABS
FUSE
RATING
30A
10A
20A
10A
10A
15A
10A
10A
10A
20A
15A
10A
10A
20A
20A
15A
10A
10A
7
Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2
Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
H010D01A-AAT
3. Exhaust Emission Control System
The Exhaust Emission Control System is a
highly effective system which controls exhaust
emissions while maintaining good vehicle
performace.
H010B01A-AAT
1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation system is
employed to prevent air pollution caused by
blow-by gases being emitted from the crank-
case. This system supplies filtered air to the
crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside
the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the PCV valve
and into the induction system.
H010A02O-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission
control system to meet all requirements of the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-
fornia Air Resources Board.
There are three emission control systems which
are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of the
emission control systems, it is recommended
that you have your car inspected and main-
tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-
cordance with the maintenance schedule in this
manual.
Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance
Test (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control Sys-
tem)
o To prevent the vehicle from misfiring
during dynamometer testing, discon-
nect the ABS connector in the engine
compartment. (2.7 V6 only)
o For more information, see shop manual
(Wheel Speed Sensor).
o After dynamometer testing is completed,
erase the ABS/TCS DTC (Diagnotic
Trouble Code) with a GST (Generic Scan
Tool) or Hi-Scan Pro.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are
absorbed and stored in the canister. When the
engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the induction system
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled
by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the
engine coolant temperature is low during idling,
the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not
taken into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to
introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
H010C01S-AAT
2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-
ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) System
The Evaporative Emission Control System is
designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow the
vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a
canister while refueling at the gas station, pre-
venting the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
3
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
!
WARNING:
o Use unleaded fuel only.
o Maintain the engine in good operating
condition. Extremely high catalytic con-
verter temperatures can result from im-
proper operation of the electrical, igni-
tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-
tion.
o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is
hard to start, have your Hyundai dealer
inspect and repair the problem as soon
as possible.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
Running out of gasoline may cause the
engine to misfire and result in damage to
the catalytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for periods
longer than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be pushed or
pulled to get started. This may cause the
catalytic converter to overheat and cre-
ate a fire hazard.
o Do not touch the catalytic converter or
any other part of the exhaust system
while the catalytic converter is hot. Shut
off the engine, wait for at least one hour
before touching the catalytic converter
or any other part of the exhaust system.
H020A01A-AAT
(If installed)
Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a monolith
type three-way catalytic converter to reduce
the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitro-
gen oxides contained in the exhaust gas. Ex-
haust gases passing through the catalytic
converter cause it to operate at a very high
temperature. The introduction of large amounts
of unburned gasoline into the exhaust may
cause the catalytic converter to overheat and
create a fire hazard. This risk may be reduced
by observing the following:
H020A01JM
Catalytic Converter
!
WARNING:
o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is
your best source of assistance.
o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-
bustible material such as grass, paper,
leaves or rags. These materials might
contact the hot catalytic converter and a
fire might result.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2
Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2
Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2
Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3
Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-6
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................... 8-7
Snow Tires .................................................................. 8-10
Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10
Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-11
Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11
Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11
When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-12
Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-13
Spare Tire and Tools................................................... 8-14
Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-14
Consumer Information................................................. 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-17
Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims (U.S.A Only) .. 8-17
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING
SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING
ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
8
8
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
2
ENGINE NUMBER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
I010B01A-AATI010A02JM-AAT
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the
number used in registering your car and in all
legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It
can be found in three different places on your
car:
1. Lower side of the front passenger seat under
the carpet.
2. On the left top side of the instrument panel
where it can be seen by looking down through
the windshield.
3. On the lower side of the left center pillar outer
panel.
The engine number is stamped on the engine
block as shown in the drawing.
I010A03JM
I010B01GK
V6DOHC (I4)
I010A02JM
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
3
TIRES
I030A03JM-AAT
RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-
TION PRESSURES
I020A02A-AAT
TIRE INFORMATION
The tires supplied on your new Hyundai
are chosen to provide the best perfor-
mance for normal driving.
If you ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to obtain ser-
vice, see the tire manufacture's booklet
included with your vehicle's Owner's
Manual Literature Kit.
Tire label located on the driver's side of
the center pillar outer panel gives the
cold tire pressures recommended for
your vehicle with the original tire size,
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
HJM1032
I03A01JM-A
Type B
I030A01JM
Type A
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
4
!
These pressures were chosen to pro-
vide the most satisfactory combination
of ride comfort, tire wear and stability
under normal conditions. Tire pressures
should be checked at least monthly.
Proper tire inflation pressures should
be maintained for these reasons:
!
WARNING:
Overinflation or underinflation can
reduce the tire life, adversely affect
vehicle handling, and lead to sud-
den tire failure. This could rusult in
loss of vehicle control and potential
injury.
Type C
I030A02-A
NOTE:
o Underinflation also results in ex-
cessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel de-
formation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by your
Hyundai Dealer.
o Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater
possibility of damage from road
hazards.
WARNING:
o Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear
and damage. Always use a tire
pressure gauge.
o Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle
control, and sudden tire failure
leading to accidents, injuries, and
even death. The recommended
cold tire pressure for your vehicle
can be found in this manual and
on the tire label located on the
driver's side of the center pillar.
o Worn tires can cause accidents.
Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged. See
page 8-12.
o Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Hyundai recom-
mends that you check the spare
every time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
5
CAUTION:
Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tires
are cold. (After the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours
or hasn't been driven more than
one mile (1.6 km) since starting
up.)
o Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
o Never overload your vehicle. Be
especially careful about overload-
ing if you equip your vehicle with
a luggage rack.
o Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been dam-
aged, replace them.
!
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly
onto the valve to get a pressure mea-
surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-
sure matches the recommended pres-
sure on the tire and loading information
label, no further adjustment is neces-
sary. If the pressure is low, add air until
you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-
sure with the tire gage. Be sure to put
the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
I035A01JM-AAT
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-
SURE
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1
mile (1.6 km).
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
6
1. Manufacturer or Brand name
o Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size (example: P235/60R16 99T)
o The "P" indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles. A
"T" is the designation for a tempo-
rary spare tire.
o Three-digit number (235): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters
of the tire from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge.
o Two-digit number (60): This num-
ber, known as the aspect ratio,
gives the tire's ratio of height to
width.
o R: The "R" stands for radial.
o Two-digit number (16): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
o Two (or three) digit number (99):
This number is the tire's load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port.
o T: Speed Rating. The speed rating
denotes the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time. The ratings range
from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).
3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-
ment of Transportation". The sym-
bol can be placed above, below or
to the left or right of the Tire Iden
tification Number. Indicates tire is
in compliance with the U.S. De-
partment of Transportation Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's
identification mark
o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size
o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-
facture
Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamen-
tal characteristics of the tire and also
provides the tire identification number
(TIN) for safety standard certification.
The TIN can be used to identify the tire
in case of a recall.
I030B01JM-AAT
TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING
I030B04JM
1
2
3
4
5, 6
7
1
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
7
o Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 3105 means
the 31st week of 2005.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester, and
others. The letter "R" means radial
ply construction; the letter "D" means
diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter "B" means belted-bias
ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation pres-
sure.
I030D01JM-AAT
TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-
TIONS
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside
the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accesso-
ries. Some examples of optional ac-
cessories are, automatic transmission,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that
is located between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from steel or
other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that hold
the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the plies are laid at alternate angles
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three perfor-
mance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Qual-
ity Grading on page 8-14.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
8
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side
of an asymmetrical tire, that must al-
ways face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number rang-
ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds to
the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a cold
tire may be inflated. The maximum air
pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-
ing for a tire at the maximum permis-
sible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The num-
ber of occupants a vehicle is designed
to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68
kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of
a asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that faces outward when mounted
on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white letter-
ing or bears manufacturer, brand and or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on passenger cars and some light duty
trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure and shown on the
tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals
(kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of
a motor vehicle with standard and op-
tional equipment including the maxi-
mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code in-
cludes the Tire Identification Number
(TIN), an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of
production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the rear axle.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
9
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between
the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maxi-
mum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire
and the road surface. The amount of
grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called "wear bars," that show
across the tread of a tire when only 2/32
inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards, a tire information system
that provides consumers with ratings
for a tire's traction, temperature and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number
of designated seating positions multi-
plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated
cargo and luggage load
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory
weight, and normal occupant weight
and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing the origi-
nal equipment tire size and recom-
mended inflation pressure
I040B01JM-AAT
ALL SEASON TIRES
Hyundai specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good perfor-
mance for use all year round, including
snowy and icy road conditions. All sea-
son tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than all season tires an may be
more appropriate in some areas.
I040C01JM-AAT
SUMMER TIRES
Hyundai specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance
is substantrally reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire trac-
tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the
tire side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
Hyundai recommends the use of snow
tires or all season tires on all four wheels.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
10
!
!
I050A06A-AAT
TIRE CHAINS
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels. Be sure
that the chains are installed in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do not
continue to use tire chains when they
are no longer needed.
WARNING:
o When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph.
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
plastic chains.
o Don't use a tire chains on a vehicle
equipped with aluminium wheels.
If it is unavoidable use wire-type
chains.
WARNING:
o Use wire chains less than 15mm to
prevent damage to the chain's
connection.
o If you have noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles.
I040A01O-AAT
SNOW TIRES
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and have
the same load capacity as the original
tires. Snow tires should be installed on
all four wheels; otherwise, poor han-
dling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires on
the tire label on the driver's side of the
center pillar , or up to the maximum
pressure shown on the tire sidewall
whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
11
HEF-241
I060A01O-AAT
TIRE ROTATION
Tires should be rotated every 7,500
miles (12,000 km). If you notice that
tires are wearing unevenly between ro-
tations, have the car checked by a
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be
corrected.
After rotating, adjust the tire pressures
and be sure to check wheel nut torque.
I080A01A-AAT
TIRE TRACTION
Tire traction can be reduced if you drive
on worn tires, tires that are improperly
inflated or on slippery road surfaces.
Tires should be replaced when tread
wear indicators appear. To reduce the
possibility of losing control, slow down
whenever there is rain, snow or ice on
the road.
I070A01A-AAT
TIRE BALANCING
A tire that is out of balance may affect
handling and tire wear. The tires on your
Hyundai were balanced before the car
was delivered but may need balancing
again during the years you own the car.
Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-
pair, it should be rebalanced before
being reinstalled on the car.
!
CAUTION:
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply
under any circumstances. This may
cause dangerous handling charac-
teristics.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
12
!!
WARNING:
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries from an accident caused
by tire failure or loss of vehicle con-
trol:
o Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged.
Worn tires can cause loss of brak-
ing effectiveness, steering con-
trol, and traction.
o Do not drive your vehicle with too
little or too much pressure in your
tires. This can lead to uneven
wear and tire failure.
o When replacing tires, never mix
radial and bias-ply tires on the
same car. You must replace all
tires (including the spare) if mov-
ing from radial to bias-ply tires.
HJM5031
I090A04JM-AAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES
The original tires on your car have tread
wear indicators . The location of tread
wear indicators is shown by the "TWI"
or " " marks, etc., The tread wear
indicators appear when the tread depth
is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be
replaced when these appear as a solid
bar across two or more grooves of the
tread. Always replace your tires with
those of the recommended size. If you
change wheels, the new wheel's rim
width and offset must meet Hyundai
specification.
TWI indicator
0.06 in. (1.6 mm)
o Using tires and wheel other than
the recommended sizes could
cause unusual handling charac-
teristics and poor vehicle control,
resulting in a serious accident.
o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's
specifications may fit poorly and
result in damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor ve-
hicle control.
WARNING:
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
13
I090B02JM-AAT
TIRE MAINTENANCE
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease tire
wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,
have your dealer check the wheel align-
ment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This will
increase vehicle ride comfort and tire
life. Additionally, a tire shoud always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel.
!
WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide for safe ride and
handling capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and
wheel that is different from the one
that is originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel com-
bination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you
should not use these tires for high-
way driving.
!
WARNING:
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, it is recom-
mended that tires tread, It is recom-
mended that tires generally be re-
placed after 6 years of normal ser-
vice. Heat caused by not climates or
frequent high loading Conditions can
accelerate the aging process. Fail-
ure to follow this Warning can result
in sudden tire failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
14
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI
VEHICLE
I120A03A-AAT
Please consult your Owner's Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet for your
vehicle's specific warranty coverage.
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS
I100A02E-AAT
Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-
lowing:
Spare tire and wheel
Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar
Jack
HJM4007
I110A01A-AAT
SHOP MANUAL
A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from your
authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-
fessional technicians, but is simple enough for
most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
!
WARNING:
o Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents, inju-
ries, and even death. Always check
tires are properly inflated before
driving. Refer to pages 2-28 and 8-
3 for proper tire pressures and
further information.
o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of ve-
hicle control, collisions, and in-
jury and even death. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as soon
as possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
tire tread before driving your car.
Refer to this page for further infor-
mation and tread limits.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
15
I130B04A-AAT
Tire Quality Grading
Department of Transportation quality
grades - All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal Safety Stan-
dards in addition to these grades. These
quality grades are molded on the
sidewall.
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
!
WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
I130A01A-AAT
This consumer information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It
provides the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-
mation on uniform tire quality grading. Your
Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
16
I130D04A-AAT
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-
factured to meet or exceed all applicable safety
standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you
to read and follow all directions in this Owner's
Manual, particularly the information under the
headings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-
ING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any
questions regarding the operation of your ve-
hicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai
Motor America Regional Office as listed below:
Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-
shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,
Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.
Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Caro-
lina, South Carolina.
Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
!
WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-
ity grades can be found on the tire
sidewall between the tread shoulder
and the maximum section width.
For example :
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-
ture A
Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-
ture grades are A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
17
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S.A only)
I130C02A-AAT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If
NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-
4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
I140A01A-AAT
Any claim or dispute you may have
related to your vehicle's warranty or the
duties contemplated under the warranty,
including claims related to the refund or
partial refund of your vehicle's purchase
price (excluding personal injury or prod-
uct liability claims), shall be resolved
by binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-
tion shall be administered by and through
the National Arbitration Forum (NAF) or
the American Arbitration Association
(AAA), under the Code of Procedure of
the entity you select.
You will not be responsible for paying
filing and hearing fees above $275.00.
All other arbitration costs shall be borne
by Hyundai Motor America. You are not
responsible to pay any of the costs
Hyundai incurs.
BINDING ARBITRATION
(U.S.A Only)
South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas,
Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Mis-
souri, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,
Texas, Wyoming.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Ken-
tucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North
Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,
California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon,
Texas, Utah, Washington.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
18
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
not deprive you of any remedies avail-
able to you under applicable law. The
parties are waiving their right to seek
remedies in court, including the right to
a jury trial.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
be governed by and interpreted under
the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.
sections 1-16. Judgment upon any award
may be entered in any court having
jurisdiction.
You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-
ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-
tronic notice. Written notice must be
delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai
Motor America, Attn: Consumer Af-
fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box
20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.
Electronic notice must be submitted at
the following website address: http://
warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.
Notice must be received within 90 days
after you purchase your vehicle.
9
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2
Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J010A01JM-AAT
MEASUREMENT
170 (4,325)
70 (1,795)
66 (1,680)
103 (2,630)
60 (1,540)
60 (1,540)
Overall Length
Overall Width
Overall Height (Unladen)
Wheel base
Wheel tread
Front
Rear
J060A01JM-AAT
FUEL SYSTEM
J020A01JM-AAT
POWER STEERING
in. (mm)
Engine
2.7L
2.0L
Fuel tank capacity
17 us.gal (65L)
15 us.gal (58L)
Type
Wheel free play
Rack stroke
Oil pump type
Rack and pinion
0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)
5.5 in. (142 mm)
Vane type
J030A01JM-AAT
TIRE
Standard
Option
Spare
P 215/65R16
P 235/60R16
T155/90R16 (Temporary)
T155/90D16 (Temporary)
2WD
4WD
J050A01JM-AAT
BRAKE
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Ventilated disc
Cable operated on rear wheel
Type
Front brake type
Rear brake type
Parking brake
CBS (With ABS)
ABS
CBS, ABS
Drum type
Disc type
Disc type
Type A
Type B, C
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
3
GASOLINE
2.7 V6
6-Cyl., V-type DOHC
86.7 × 75.0
2,656
1-2-3-4-5-6
Auto lash
Auto lash
Auto lash
Auto lash
650 ± 100
BTDC 12° ± 5°
2.0 DOHC
4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
82 × 93.5
1,975
1-3-4-2
700 ± 100
BTDC 8° ± 5°
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement (cc)
Firing order
Valve Clearance
(Cold engine : 20±5°C)
Idle speed (rpm)
Ignition timing
ENGINE
J070A02JM-AAT
0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)
0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )
0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)
0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)
For adjusting
For checking
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4
Oil & Grease Standard
SAE 5W-20, 5W-30
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE
SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS SAE MTF SAE 75W/85 (API GL-4)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
PSF-3 TYPE FLUID
DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent
Item
Engine Oil
Recommends
Transaxle Manual
Automatic
Transfer case
Rear Axle
Coolant
Power steering gear
Brakes and clutch fluid
LUBRICATION CHART
J080A03JM-AAT
Q'ty u.s.qts. (liter)
Drain and refill with oil filter
2.0 L : 4.23 (4.0)
2.7 L : 4.76 (4.5)
2.2 (2.1)
8.2 (7.8)
0.8 (0.8)
0.8 (0.75)
7.4 (7.0)
0.95 (0.9)
As required
10
10
INDEX
10
INDEX
2
A
Air bag ............................................................................................... 1-33
Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-10
Air Conditioning
Care .............................................................................................. 6-16
Operation ............................................................................ 1-99, 6-16
Switch ...........................................................................................1-99
Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-126
Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-67
Audio System ................................................................................. 1-111
B
Battery ............................................................................................... 6-23
Binding Arbitration (U.S.A Only) ....................................................... 8-17
Brake
Anti-lock brake system ................................................................ 2-13
Traction control system (TCS) ...................................................2-13
Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-14
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..................................................... 2-15
Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-11
Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-20
Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-19
Practices ...................................................................................... 2-19
Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3
Bulb Replacement .............................................................................6-27
C
California Perchlorate Notice ............................................................5-10
Care of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-124
Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-124
Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7
Child Restraint System .....................................................................1-25
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System .....................................................1-26
Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System .... 1-28
Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-66
Clock ................................................................................................. 1-65
Clutch
Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-16
Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-19
Combination Light
Auto light ....................................................................................... 1-60
Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-59
Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-59
High-beam switch ........................................................................1-59
Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-58
Parking light auto off ..................................................................... 1-59
Turn signal operation ...................................................................1-58
Consumer Information ......................................................................8-15
Cooling Fans .....................................................................................6-24
Corrosion protection
Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2
Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3
Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-87
10
INDEX
3
D
Defrosting / Defogging ................................................................... 1-100
Door
Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-7
Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4
Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-86
Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-67
Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-20
Driving
Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-22
Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-23
Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-23
E
Emission Control System ................................................................... 7-2
Engine
Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-4
Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2
Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-8
Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-53
If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4
Number ........................................................................................... 8-2
Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5
Starting ........................................................................................... 2-6
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2
F
4WD Lock System ............................................................................ 2-19
Fan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-93
Floor Mat Anchor ..............................................................................1-85
Fog Light
Front .............................................................................................1-64
Front Seats
Adjustable front seats ..................................................................1-12
Adjustable headrests ...................................................................1-13
Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..........................................1-12
Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-13
Fuel
Capacity ......................................................................................... 9-2
Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-53
Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2
Fuel Filler Lid
Remote release ............................................................................ 1-82
Full-time 4WD Operation .................................................................. 2-16
Fuses ................................................................................................ 6-21
Fuse panel description ...................................................................... 6-35
G
General Checks .................................................................................. 6-4
Glove Box .......................................................................................... 1-72
H
Hazard Warning System .................................................................. 1-64
Heating and Cooling Control .......................................................... 1-102
Heating and Ventilation
Air flow control .............................................................................. 1-94
Air intake control switch ............................................................ 1-103
Bi-level heating ............................................................................. 1-98
10
INDEX
4
Defrosting / Defogging ................................................................. 1-98
Fan speed control (Blower control) ............................................. 1-93
Temperature control ....................................................................1-97
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................................... 1-82
Hood Release .................................................................................... 1-84
Horn ................................................................................................. 1-87
How to Use Luggage Room ............................................................. 1-79
I
Ignition Switch ...................................................................................... 2-5
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-46
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................................... 1-66
Interior Light ....................................................................................... 1-71
J
Jump Starting ......................................................................................3-3
K
Keys ................................................................................................... 1-3
If you lose your keys ...................................................................3-19
Positions ......................................................................................... 2-5
L
Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................................. 6-27
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................................1-79
Luggage Net ...................................................................................... 1-81
M
Maintenance Intervals
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6
Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4
Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rear View Mirror With Compass ................ 1-75
Day-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-75
Outside rearview mirror ............................................................... 1-73
Outside rearview mirror Heater .................................................. 1-74
O
Odometer / Trip Odometer ...............................................................1-54
Occupant Classification System ......................................................1-38
P
Parking Brake .................................................................................... 1-77
Power Outlet ...................................................................................... 1-66
Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................... 6-24
R
Rear Seat
Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-16
Folding rear seatback ..................................................................1-16
Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-65
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................................. 8-17
Risk of Rollover ................................................................................... 2-3
Roof Rack ......................................................................................... 1-81
10
INDEX
5
S
Seat
Front ............................................................................................. 1-12
Rear .............................................................................................. 1-16
Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-15
Seat Belts
3-point system .............................................................................1-21
Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-31
Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-22
Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-19
Precautions .................................................................................. 1-18
Shop Manual ...................................................................................... 8-14
Shopping Bag Holders ...................................................................... 1-78
Sound
Brake pad warning sound ............................................................ 1-52
Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-71
Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-54
Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-6
Steering Wheel Free play .................................................................6-19
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .................................................................. 1-86
Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-109
Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-68
Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-85
T
Tachometer .......................................................................................1-54
Tail Gate ............................................................................................ 1-78
Tail gate window ........................................................................... 1-78
Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8
Ticket Holder ..................................................................................... 1-86
Tires
Balancing ...................................................................................... 8-11
Chains .......................................................................................... 8-10
Changing a flat tire ....................................................................... 3-11
If you have a flat tire ..................................................................... 3-10
Information ...................................................................................... 8-2
Maintenance .................................................................................8-13
Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3
Replacement ................................................................................ 8-12
Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-11
Sidewall Labeling ............................................................................ 8-6
Snow tires ..................................................................................... 8-10
Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-8
Terminology and Definition ............................................................ 8-7
Traction ........................................................................................ 8-11
Towing
A trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-26
Emergency ................................................................................... 3-18
If your car must be towed ............................................................3-16
Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-13
Transaxle
Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-9
Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-12
Manual ............................................................................................2-7
Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-11
Trip Computer ...................................................................................1-55
10
INDEX
6
V
Vehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2
Vechcle Load Limit ............................................................................2-29
Vehicle Specifications
Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3
Lubrication chart .................................................................. 9-4 ~ 9-5
Measurement .................................................................................9-2
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................................1-48
Windows
Power ........................................................................................... 1-11
Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-60
Rear Window wiper and washer switch ......................................1-63
Windshield Wiper Blade De-icer ....................................................... 1-64
Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-10
Winter Driving .................................................................................... 2-23
A000A01A-AAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL OWNER
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP CODE
DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP CODE
gkflhma-0.p65 9/12/2006, 3:13 PM13
Seoul Korea
Printing: JAN. 22, 2008
Publication No.: A2EO-EU81E
Printed in Korea
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
FUEL:
UNLEADED gasoline only
Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 2.7L: 17 (14.3, 65), 2.0L: 15 (12.8, 58)
TIRE PRESSURE:
See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.
OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:
See pages 8-3 through 8-14.
HOOD RELEASE:
Pull handle under left side of dash.
ENGINE OIL:
API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel
efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures
are above 0°F (-18°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-
5 or 9-4.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE:
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil level
should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:
Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector lever
through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check the level
of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,
DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III
specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..
QUICK INDEX
o Car will not start....................................................................... 3-2
o Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6
o Warning light/chime comes on...................................... 1-48 ~ 1-52
o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4
o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-16
o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4
o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km)............................ 1-3
o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4
o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-17
46

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Hyundai-Tucson-2008

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Hyundai Tucson 2008 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Hyundai Tucson 2008 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 11,54 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info